人教初一英语上册导学案学案

人教初一英语上册导学案学案

‎ ‎ Unit1 My name’s Gina 导学案 学习内容：第一课时（SectionA 1a—2c）‎ 学习目标：‎ 1. 根据已学音标，准确地拼读和掌握本课词汇（见词汇表100页，P.1和P.2）‎ 2. 掌握简单的问候语并能自我介绍；正确地用英语询问他人的姓名，初步培养学生用英语进行交际的能力。‎ 3. 通过本节内容的学习，使学生学会如何礼貌地与他人交往。‎ 重 难 点：‎ 1. 重点：掌握本节重点单词和短语 2. 难点：(1)灵活运用所学交际用语介绍自己，问候他人。‎ ‎ （2）Grammar Focus 自学指导: 1.正确拼读生词 2.牢记单词的拼写及词意 3.朗读1b和2c的对话。‎ ‎【课前自学】‎ 一． 预习单词 ‎ ‎ 1.根据音标拼读并牢记本课单词（小组互相检查单词读写情况）‎ ‎2.通过预习，你能准确写出下列单词吗？‎ 我的 遇见 你、你们 令人愉快的 和、又 ‎ 她的 问题、难题 回答、答案 名字 时钟 ‎ 他的 你的、你们的 ‎ 二．看1a中的图片，写出图中物品的英语单词，你能写几个？尽可能的多写几个。‎ ‎ ‎ 三．完成下列对话，每空一词。‎ A: Hello! your name? B: name’s Jenny.‎ A: I’m Tony. B: Nice to meet , Tony.‎ ‎【课堂流程】‎ Step1 展示学习目标 Step2 检查生词预习（1）抽查学生朗读生词，教师及时正音。然后领读、齐读。(2)听写生词，让学生以合作小 ‎ 组为单位互批互改，小组长汇报检查情况。‎ Step3 导入新课：复习good morning/afternoon/evening!Hi Hello!问候他人。引入My name’s……,What’s your ‎ ‎ name?Nice to meet you!介绍自己，问候他人。‎ Setp4 Listening(1b 2a and 2b) Pairwork(1c and 2c)对桌练习并展示小对话。‎ Step5 点拨解疑 ‎ 区别hello与hi (1) hello与hi可以互换，都表示“喂，你好”。但hi比hello用得更多，显得更随和亲近，它尤被美国年轻人所使 ‎ 用。但打电话时常用hello而少用hi。熟人、朋友见面时，彼此问候仅仅说声Hi！就可以了。用hello时，不 ‎ 能“Hello, hello, hello”这样反复使用。‎ ‎（2）要注意hello/hi一般不用于与师长、上级、年长者以及有身份的人打招呼，以免显得对长辈不够尊重。‎ Step6 当堂检测 一． 单词填空：根据句意和首字提示，写出所缺单词。‎ ‎1.What’s your n ? ------John ‎2.Nice to m you . ------Nice to meet you too.‎ ‎3.H name is Tom . ‎ ‎4. H name is Gina ‎ 二．写出下列各词的缩写形式 ‎1.I am . 2.My name is . 3.What is . 4.It is .‎ 三．翻译下列句子。‎ ‎1.她叫什么名字？ 她的名字叫Jenny .‎ ‎ .‎ ‎2.我是Gina .见到你很高兴。‎ ‎ .‎ ‎3.他的名字叫Bob .‎ ‎ .‎ Steo7 学科班长总结。‎ Step8 小结，整理笔记。‎ Unit 1 导学案 学习内容：第二课时（section A 3a—4）‎ 学习目标：‎ ‎1、准确拼读并掌握下列词汇：first, first name ,last ,last name,boy,girl,Green,Miller,Jack,Smith,Brown,Linda Nick,Kin.‎ ‎2、掌握英文名字的表达法，正确识别last name 和 first name 的用法。‎ ‎3、通过对中西方姓名文化的了解，激发学生学习英语的兴趣，培养其自信心。‎ 重难点：‎ 重点：问候他人及英文名字的正确表达。‎ 难点：如何准确把握中英文姓名间的异同，培养学生跨文化交际的意识。‎ 自学指导：1、正确朗读生词。 2、牢记单词的拼写及词意。 3、了解姓和名在英语和汉语中的位置有何不同。‎ ‎【课前自习】‎ 一、预习单词，掌握读音及拼写 通过预习单词，你能准确写出下列单词吗?‎ 第一的 最后的 男孩 女孩 姓氏 名字 ‎ 二、完成P3 3a部分。（填在书上）‎ ‎【课堂流程】‎ Setp1 展示学习目标。‎ Setp2 检查生词预习：朗读并听写生词。‎ Setp3 导入新课：复习句型：What’s your /her/his name ?‎ 引入 first name 和 last name.‎ Setp4 朗读 3a, 完成3b 的列表。‎ Practicing: A: What’s your first name ? B: My first name is .‎ ‎ A: What’s your last name ? B: My last name is .‎ Setp5 Name Game .‎ Introduce the rule of the game ，然后组织学生互动。‎ S1: My name is Tonny.‎ S2:His name is Tonny. My name is Linda.‎ S3: His name is Tonny. Her name is Linda. My name is Nick .‎ S4: His name is Tonny. Her name is Linda. His name is Nick . My name is Kin .‎ Step6:当堂检测：‎ 一、写出你们小组每个人的名字 First name Last name 二、根据句意，填入所缺单词。‎ ‎1、Tony Brown is a boy . His first name is , his last name is .‎ ‎2、I’m a girl , my name is Kate Green . Kate ia my name ,Green is my name .‎ Step7.学科班长总结。‎ Step8.小结，整理笔记。‎ Unit 1 导学案 学习内容：第三课时（section B 1a—2c）‎ 学习目标：‎ ‎1、准确拼读并掌握下列词汇：数字0---9 ,telephone ,number ,phone ,it .‎ ‎2、通过听说训练，学会询问和给出电话号码。‎ ‎3、,通过本课的学习，培养学生有好交际的能力，融洽同学关系。‎ 重点：拼读和书写表达数字的单词。‎ 难点：正确流利地询问电话号码和给出电话号码。‎ 自学指导：‎ ‎1、通过已学音标拼读生词并熟记数字的单词。‎ ‎2、准备好各自的电话号码（把名字和电话号码写在小卡片上）。‎ ‎【课前自习】‎ ‎1、准确拼读生词；‎ ‎2、牢记0—9的英文单词，并按顺序默写： ‎ ‎3、熟悉1c的对话。‎ 二、完成P3 3a部分。（填在书上）‎ ‎【课堂流程】‎ Setp1 展示学习目标。‎ Setp2 检查生词预习情况：朗读并听写生词。‎ Setp3 导入新课：复习操练对话：‎ A: What’s your last/first name ? B: My last/first name is .‎ ‎ A: What’s your telephone number ? B: It’s .‎ Setp4 Listening (1a, 1b, 2a, 2b ) 。‎ Setp5 Practicing:‎ ‎1、对桌检查背诵0—9；‎ ‎2、对桌练习对话：A：What’s your telephone number ? B: It’s .‎ ‎3、2c.Ask and fill in the chart .‎ Step6:当堂检测：‎ 一、用英语写出下列电话号码：‎ ‎1、66320528 ‎ ‎2、72568319 ‎ ‎3、27231546 ‎ ‎4、1386524768 ‎ 二、完成对话，每空一词。‎ A: I’m Frank name ?‎ B: name is David .‎ A:What’s your ?‎ B: 8625178 .‎ A: is your phone ?‎ B: It’s white.‎ Step7.学科班长总结。‎ Step8.小结，整理笔记。‎ Unit 1 导学案 学习内容：第四课时（section B 3a—4）‎ 学习目标：‎ ‎1、拼读并掌握生词：card, ID card, family, family name, Hand. 巩固数字0—9。‎ ‎2、学会正确阅读和书写ID card .‎ ‎3、通过本科学习，让学生了解中外文化的差异，拓展学生的视野，提高学习兴趣。‎ 重难点：‎ 重点：正确掌握英文名字的表述，读懂ID card 。‎ 难点：运用所学知识描述自己或他人的个人信息。‎ 自学指导：‎ ‎1、拼读并牢记生词。‎ ‎2、准备一张小卡片。‎ ‎【课前自学】‎ 一、拼读并牢记生词，写出所对应的单词：‎ ‎1、卡、卡片 2、身份证 3、家、家庭 4、姓氏 ‎ 二、完成3a部分。（填在书上）‎ ‎【课堂流程】Setp1 展示学习目标。Setp2 检查生词预习情况：正音和听写生词。‎ Setp3 导入新课：‎ ‎(一)Practicing:‎ A: What’s your first name ? B: My first name is .‎ A: What’s your last name ? B: My last name is .‎ A: What’s your telephone number ? B: My telephone number is .‎ ‎(二) 3a： Read 1—5 .‎ ‎(三) 3b . Ask and answer the questions in pairs .‎ ‎(四) 3c. 填写自己的身份证，并描述自己的个人信息：‎ I’m . My first name is . My last name is . My telephone number is _____ .‎ ‎(五) Part 4‎ ‎（1）学生把电话号码写在小卡片上，然后放进袋子里。‎ ‎（2）另一学生从袋子里抽出一张卡片并找出上面的电话号码是谁写的。‎ Practicing:‎ A: What’s your telephone number ? B: My telephone number is .‎ Step4: 当堂检测：‎ 一、翻译短语和句子：‎ ‎1、身份证 ；2、姓氏 ；3、他姓什么？ ？‎ ‎4、她的电话号码是多少？ 。‎ 二、根据短文内容完成表格。‎ ‎ My name is Jim Green . My fiest name is Jim . My last name is Green . I’m an English boy . I,m nine years old (岁) . My telephone number is 5466778 .‎ First name ‎ Last name ‎ Age(年龄) ‎ Sex (性别) ‎ Telephone number ‎ Step7.学科班长总结。‎ Step8.总结，整理笔记。‎ ‎2010年下期初一英语导学案 编号：05 时间：2010.9.17 编写人：黄玉华 审核人： 班级： 小组： 姓名： 组内评价： 教师评价： ‎ Unit 1 复习学案 学习目标：‎ ‎1、扎实掌握本单元的重点单词、短语和句子；‎ ‎2、通过小组合作训练，能利用基础知识分析解决问题；.‎ ‎3、通过本单元的学习，将所学知识与学生的生活密切相连，培养学生的学习兴趣，融洽学生之间的关系。‎ 重难点：‎ 重点：复习并掌握本单元重点词汇和有关“介绍”的句型。‎ 难点：理解first name ，last name 的中外差别。‎ 自学指导：‎ ‎1、朗读并牢记重点词汇和句子。‎ ‎2、认真研究导学案。‎ ‎【课前自学】‎ 一、朗读并牢记以下词汇：‎ My .name . is .name’s .name is clock . I . am . I’m . I am . nice . to . meet . you . what . what’s . what is your . hello . hi . his . her . and . question . answer . look . first . first name . last . last name boy . girl . zero . one . two . three . four . five . six . seven . eight . nine . telephone . number . phone . telephone number .phone number it it’s : it is .card . ID card family . family name .‎ 二、快速背诵句子 ‎① -My name’s Mary.‎ ‎ - Hi,Mary! I’m Jim. Nice to meet you.‎ ‎② –What’s your/his/her name?‎ ‎-My/His/Her name is … .‎ ‎- What’s your/his/her first name?‎ ‎-My/His/Her first name is … .‎ ‎- What’s your/his/her last name?‎ ‎-My/His/Her last name is … .‎ ‎③ -What’s your telephone number?‎ ‎-It’s … .‎ ‎【课堂流程】‎ Setp1 展示学习目标。‎ Setp2 Have a check . 写出所对应的英语单词（用电子白板呈现）‎ ‎1、我的 ； 2、时钟 ； 3、遇见 ； 4、问题 ； 5男孩 ；6、数字 ； 7、卡片 ； 8、家 ； 9、七 ；10、零 。‎ Setp3 挑战自我，快速记忆，对桌互查（用电子白板呈现）：‎ ‎（1）What’s your name ?(你叫什么名字？) My name is Jenny（我的名字叫詹妮） .‎ ‎（2）What’s his name ?(他叫什么名字？) His name isTony(他的名字叫托尼) .‎ ‎（3）What’s her name ?(她叫什么名字？) Her name is Gina (她的名字叫吉娜).‎ ‎（4）What’s your telephone number ?(你的电话号码是多少？) ‎ ‎ It’s 8686186. (是8686186)‎ ‎（5）What’s her family / last name?(她姓什么？)‎ ‎（6）What’s his first name?(他叫什么？)‎ ‎ (7 ) Nice to meet you. (见到你很高兴)‎ Step4.Exercises:‎ 一． 完成对话。‎ ‎（1）A: Hi! B: Hi!‎ ‎ A; ? B: My name is Alice.‎ ‎ A: Nice to meet you. B: ‎ ‎ (2 ) A: ? B: Her name is Mary.‎ A: ? B: Her family name is Green.‎ A: ? B: It’s 5436789.‎ A; Thank you. B: You are welcome.‎ 二． 改错。（选出错误选项并改正）‎ (1) What’s your phone number? He is 8765321. ‎ A B C D ‎ (2 ) What’s your name? Her name is Mary. ‎ ‎ A B C D ‎ (3 ) Nice too meet you. ‎ ‎ A B C D ‎ (4 ) What’s color is it? It’s yellow. ‎ ‎ A B C D ‎ (5 ) He is a English boy. ‎ ‎ A B C D 三．句型转换 （每空一词）‎ ‎ （1） Hello! My name’s Gina. （写出同义句）‎ ‎ Hello! Gina.‎ ‎(2 ) My phone number is 5558137. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ Phone number ?‎ ‎(3 ) His name is Jack. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ His name ?‎ 一． 口头作文：至少用4句话介绍自己的情况。‎ Unit1 训练学案 If you put your heart into it, it will be easy.(只要你用心去做，它将会很简单)。‎ 学习目标：‎ 1. 扎实掌握Unit1的单词、短语和重点句子。‎ 2. 通过独立思考和小组合作，能自如地介绍自己或询问他人的个人性息。‎ 3. 全力以赴，高效学习，享受学习的快乐。‎ 重难点：‎ 1. 掌握用于“介绍”的交际用语。‎ 2. 如何在真实环境中运用所学语言同别人进行交流来获取信息。‎ 学法指导：‎ 1. 充分复习本单元。‎ 2. 限时闭卷完成导学案，规范书写，独立思考，标出疑难点，准备上课小组合作探讨，答疑解惑。‎ 一、单项选择。‎ ‎ 从所给的A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。‎ ‎( ) 1. ______ am a girl. _______ name is Wang Lei. ‎ A. I; I B. I; My C. My; I D. My; i ‎( ) 2. I’m Lucy Brown. Lucy is my ______ name. So you can call（称呼）me Lucy or Miss Brown.‎ A. first B. middle C. last D. family ‎( ) 3. —What’s your English teacher’s name? —______ name is John Smith.‎ A. He B. His C. She D. Her ‎( ) 4. This is Linda. She ______ an English girl.‎ A. is B. am C. are D. be ‎( ) 5. —What’s your ________？ —It’s 555-6688.‎ A. name B. first name C. phone number D. last name ‎( ) 6. —Do you know(知道) the answer to the ________? —Sorry, I don’t know.‎ A. telephone B. number C. family D. question ‎( ) 7. —What’s this ______ English? —It’s a map.‎ A. at B. in C. / D. on ‎( ) 8. —_______ is your pen？ —It’s black.‎ A. What B. How C. What’s color D. What color ‎( ) 9.What’s her phone number? phone number is 5657321.‎ A. / B. her C. His D. Her ‎ ‎( ) 10. —My name is Gina. —Hi, Gina! ___________‎ A. Nice meeting you! B. What’s your name?‎ C. Nice to meet you! D. Thank you.‎ 二．用am，is，are填空 ‎1. What ________ her name? ‎ ‎2. My name ________ Jill. ‎ ‎3. I ________ Gina. ‎ ‎4. Her name ________ Lucy. ‎ ‎5. ________ his name Jack?‎ ‎6. ________ you Toby?‎ ‎7. My phone number ________ 2836579.‎ ‎8. It ________ my English book. ‎ ‎9. His family name ________ White.‎ ‎10. You________ in Grade One. ‎ 三．根据下列中文提示,写出正确的英语单词。‎ ‎1. Nice to _____ (遇见) you.‎ ‎2. ---What’s this? ---It’s a ______ (时钟).‎ ‎3. ______ (看) at this picture, please. ‎ ‎4. My _______(第一) name is Tony. ‎ ‎5. Is ________(它) a number? ‎ ‎6. I have a sister. _________（他的） name is Jenny. ‎ ‎7. ---What’s your _____(最后的) name? ---Smith.‎ ‎8. I have a new _____(电话). Its number is 567—9863.‎ ‎9. Is “Smith” ______(你的) name? ‎ ‎10. Look at the ID _______(卡片)and answer the questions. ‎ 四．选出下面句子的答语，将其字母序号填入句前括号内 ‎( )1. How are you ?‎ ‎( )2. What’s your first name?‎ ‎( )3. What’s your last name?‎ ‎( )4. Nice to meet you.‎ ‎( )5. What’s his name?‎ ‎( )6 What’s her phone number?‎ ‎( )7. What’s her name?‎ ‎( )8. What’s this in English? ‎ ‎( )9. What color is it? ‎ ‎( )10. Good afternoon.‎ A. Her name is Mary.‎ B. His name is Jim.‎ C. My first name is John.‎ D. It’s 555-6789.‎ E. I’m fine. Thank you.‎ F. My last name is Black.‎ G. Good afternoon.‎ H. It’s a pen. ‎ I. It’s black.‎ J. Nice to meet you, too.‎ 五、改错。(每个句子只有一处错误，请在错误的单词下面划线，改在后边的横线上)‎ ‎1. What’s you name? 2. His name is Jenny. ‎ ‎3. I name is Gina. 4. I’s Gina. ‎ ‎5. Jim is his last name. ‎ 六．阅读理解 Hi, I am Eric Jones. I am twelve years old. I lost（丢失） my school ID card on playground(操场),and a blue notebook（笔记本）. My phone number is 545 - 6766.‎ ‎1. First name: _____________________‎ ‎2. Last name: _____________________‎ ‎3. Telephone number: _____________________‎ ‎4. What color is the notebook? _____________________‎ 七、写作。（字数30字左右，书写工整）‎ ‎1．根据自己的实际情况完成下面身份卡，填在横线上。‎ ‎ ID Card Name _______________‎ First Name ________________‎ Last Name ________________‎ Phone Number ________________‎ Sex(性别) ‎ ‎2．根据所填写的信息，向同班同学介绍自己的情况。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Unit2 Is this your pencil ?导学案 学习内容：第一课时（SectionA 1a—1c）‎ 学习目标：‎ 1. 正确拼读并掌握本节内容的生词 （见词汇表P100 and P101: P7 ）‎ 2. 根据不同场景，能用英语对物品的所属进行提问和回答。‎ 3. 通过寻找主人的游戏和失物招领等活动，培养学生拾金不昧的良好品质和健康向上的人格。 ‎ 重难点：‎ ‎1、生词的记忆；‎ ‎2、指示代词this 、that的用法；‎ ‎3、Be动词引导的一般疑问句及其简单回答。‎ 使用说明：提前下发导学案，根据要求预习课文，文成导学案上的内容，标出疑难点，准备上课小组讨论解决。‎ 自学指导：‎ ‎1、正确拼读生词。‎ ‎2、牢记单词的拼写及词意。‎ ‎3、朗读1a图片中的对话。‎ ‎【课前自学】‎ 一、预习单词：‎ ‎1、个人试读，组内相互纠正发音；‎ ‎2、汉译英：‎ 铅笔 钢笔 书 橡皮 直尺 ‎ 双肩背包 字典 铅笔刀 ‎ 二、认真观察1a的图画，将词语与图中物品相匹配。‎ 三、朗读1a图片中的对话，了解大意。‎ ‎【课堂流程】‎ Setp1 展示学习目标。‎ Setp2 检查生词预习 ‎（1）抽查学生朗读生词，教师及时正音，然后领读、齐读。‎ ‎（2）听写生词，让学生以合作小组为单位互批互改，小组长汇报检查情况。 ‎ Step3 . 复习物主代词my 、your 、his 、her ，利用实物引入新课：‎ What’s this in English ? It’s a/an ……‎ Is this/that/your …… ? Yes , it is . / No , it isn’t . ‎ Setp4 Listening . 1b . 听一遍录音，给对话编号。‎ 听第二遍录音，完成句子：‎ ‎（1）Is your ruler ? No , it isn’t . It’s ruler .‎ ‎（2）Is that your ? No , it isn’t . It’s backpack .‎ ‎（3）Is this pencil ? , it is . It’s pencil .‎ Setp5 Practicing . 请与对桌根据1b 内容进行句型练习对话。‎ Setp6 当堂检测：‎ 一、英汉互译 .‎ your dictionary , his backpack , my ruler ,‎ 他的卷笔刀 ， 她的书 。‎ 二、单项选择。‎ ‎1、This is eraser . A. a B. an C. the ‎2、Is that your book ? ‎ A. That isn’t B. Yes , that is C. No , it isn’t ‎3、Is this your backpack ? ‎ A . Yes , it is . B . Yes , it isn’t . C . No , it is .‎ 三、翻译句子 ‎1、这是你的字典吗？ ？‎ 是，它是 .‎ ‎2、那是你的钢笔吗？ ？‎ 不，它不是 .‎ 一． 完成句子。‎ ‎1、你捡到了一支钢笔，想知道是不是你同桌的，你会这样问他。‎ ‎ ?‎ ‎2、你的朋友问你那本书是不是你的，你会如何告诉对方它不是你的呢？‎ ‎ . ‎ Setp7 总结、整理。‎ ‎2010年下期初一英语导学案 编号：08 时间：2010.9.22 编写人：黄玉华 审核人： 班级： 小组： 姓名： 组内评价： 教师评价： ‎ ‎ Unit2 导学案 学习内容：第二课时（SectionA 2a—4b）‎ 学习目标：‎ ‎1、正确拼读并掌握本节内容的生词 （见词汇表P101: P8、 P9 ）‎ ‎2、熟练运用识别物主以及拼读单词的句型。 ‎ 重难点：‎ ‎1、拼读并牢记单词。‎ ‎2、复习确认物主的句型。‎ ‎3、朗读第三部分的对话，并了解其大意。‎ ‎【课前自学】‎ 一、预习生词，掌握读音，牢记单词的拼写及词意。‎ 你能又快又准地翻译下列单词和短语吗？‎ 打扰一下 ，感谢你 ，拼写 ，英语 ，多么/怎样 .‎ 二、朗读Grammar Focus 和第3部分的对话，说出图中出现的5中物品名称，并把单词写在对应的图片下 ‎【课堂流程】‎ Setp1 展示学习目标。‎ Setp2 检查生词预习：正音和听写生词。‎ Step3 . Listening: 2a .首先用英语说出图片中的物品名称，然后听录音，完成任务。2b .听录音，不全对话，再听录音并跟读，理解对话并背诵对话。‎ Setp4 Pairwork : 用实物对桌操练询问物品主人的句型 A: Is this your ……? B: Yes, it is . / No, it isn’t . It’s her/his ……‎ Setp5 Practicing . 3 . 用图片中的物品，对桌练习对话。‎ Setp6 当堂检测：‎ 一、背诵 Grammar Focus .‎ 二、翻译句子。‎ ‎1、这是她的橡皮吗? ?‎ 是,它是。 .‎ ‎2、那是我的铅笔吗 ? ?‎ 不,它不是。 .‎ ‎3、这是你的书。 .‎ ‎4、你怎样拼写它？ ？‎ A . Yes , it is . B . Yes , it isn’t . C . No , it is .‎ 三、句型转换 ‎1、This is a pencil . (改为一般疑问句) ？‎ ‎2、This is a key . (对划线部分提问) is this ？‎ 四、连词成句。‎ ‎1、that . her . eraser . is . ?‎ ‎2、spill . you . how . do . rule . ?‎ ‎3、is . my . this . pencil . sharpener . .‎ ‎4、is . it . his . notebook . . ‎ ‎5、number . her . phone . 2533551 . is . .‎ Setp7 总结、整理。‎ ‎2010年下期初一英语导学案 编号：09 时间：2010.9.23 编写人：黄玉华 审核人： 班级： 小组： 姓名： 组内评价： 教师评价： ‎ Unit2 导学案 学习内容：第三课时（SectionB 1a—2c）‎ 学习目标：‎ ‎1、正确拼读并掌握核心词汇：baseboll . watch . computer . game . key . notebook . call . ring . ‎ ‎2、熟练运用上一节所学句型，快速准确地拼写生词。‎ ‎3、通过开展小组活动，引导学生与他人合作，相互学习，相互帮助，共同完成学习任务。 ‎ 重难点：1、牢记单词。‎ ‎2、熟练运用what 和how 引起的特殊疑问句。‎ 自学指导：1、正确拼读生词。牢记生词的拼写和词意。‎ ‎2、巩固上一节课所学重点句型。‎ ‎【课前自学】‎ 一、预习生词： ‎ ‎1、正确拼读生词，牢记生词的拼写和词意。‎ ‎2、英汉互译：‎ Watch , key , ring , 棒球 ， 电脑 ， 笔记本 。‎ 二、预习 1a . 用英语说出图片中物品的名称并完成任务。‎ ‎【课堂流程】‎ Setp1 展示学习目标。‎ Setp2 检查生词预习：正音和听写生词。‎ Step3 . Practicing : 用1a 图片中的物品名称练习对话：‎ A: What’s this ? B: It’s a ……‎ A: How do you spell it ? B: ……‎ Setp4 Listening 2a and 2b .‎ Setp5 Pairwork 2c Setp6 当堂检测：‎ 一、根据汉语提示，补全句子 。‎ ‎1、That is my game . (电子游戏) 2、This is your (手表) .‎ ‎3、It’s his (棒球) . 4、What’s this in （英语）.‎ ‎5、Your (笔记本) is very nice .‎ 二、补全对话：‎ A: Excuse me , what’s this English ?‎ B: It’s watch .‎ A: do you it ?‎ B: W---A---T----C----H .‎ A: Is this watch ?‎ B: No , it . My watch is black .‎ 三、用how 或what 填空。‎ ‎1、 is this in English ? It’s a book .‎ ‎2、 do you spell it ?‎ ‎3、 is his name ? Jack ‎4、 is your phone number ? 3576378‎ ‎5、 are you ? I’m fine , thanks .‎ Setp7 总结、整理。‎ ‎2010年下期初一英语导学案 编号：10 时间：2010.9.24 编写人：黄玉华 审核人： 班级： 小组： 姓名： 组内评价： 教师评价： ‎ Unit2 导学案 学习内容：第四课时（SectionB 3a—4）‎ 学习目标：‎ ‎1、正确拼读并掌握本课生词（见词汇表P101 :P11）‎ ‎2、能读懂并会写寻物启示和失物招领。‎ 重难点：学会写寻物启示和失物招领。‎ 自学指导：1、正确拼读并牢记生词。‎ ‎2、预习3a . 朗读并了解其大意。‎ ‎【课前自学】‎ 一、预习生词： ‎ ‎1、拼读并牢记本课生词（小组互查单词读写情况）。‎ ‎2、根据汉语写出英语单词或者短语：‎ 在……里面 , 学校 , 请 , 失物招领 ， 打电话 ， ‎ 一副、一套 。‎ 二、自读3a . 了解大意并完成所规定的任务。‎ ‎【课堂流程】‎ Setp1 展示学习目标。‎ Setp2 检查生词预习：正音和听写生词。‎ Step3 : (1) 朗读3a并填写下表 L / F ‎ 1‎ ‎2‎ ‎ 3‎ ‎ 4‎ what Who(谁)‎ Phone number ‎×‎ L : Lost F : Found ‎(2) 看3a 中的公告，教师讲解并引导学生归纳如何写寻物启事和失物招领。‎ Setp4 完成3b和3c .‎ Setp5 当堂检测：‎ 一、快速翻译下列句子 。‎ ‎1、那是你的手表吗 ？ ‎ ‎2、请以5478235给吉姆打电话 ‎ .‎ ‎3、你的电子游戏在失物招领处吗？ ‎ ‎ .‎ 二、根据所提供的信息，学写寻物启事和失物招领：‎ ‎1、Kate 拾到了一只手表，她的电话是5237564 。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎2、Jim 丢了一串钥匙，他的电话是2783564 。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Setp6 总结、整理。‎ ‎2010年下期初一英语导学案 编号：11 时间：2010.9.27 编写人：黄玉华 审核人： 班级： 小组： 姓名： 组内评价： 教师评价： ‎ Unit2 复习学案 学习目标：‎ ‎1、扎实掌握本单元的重点单词、短语和句子。‎ ‎2、通过本单元的学习，使学生能熟练运用句型Is this /that……?来确认物主关系。‎ ‎3、会写失物招领和寻物启事。‎ 重难点：学会写寻物启示和失物招领。‎ 自学指导：1、朗读并牢记重点词汇和句子。‎ ‎2、认真研究导学案。‎ ‎【课前自学】‎ 一、朗读并牢记重点词汇 自测： 橡皮 直尺 双肩背包 字典 ‎ 这、这个 那，那个 拼写 钥匙 学校 ‎ 打搅了 电子游戏 一套钥匙 失物招领 ‎ 谢谢 给某人打电话 。‎ 二、快速背诵下列句子。‎ ‎1、Is this your pencil ? Yes , it is . / No , it isn’t . ‎ ‎2、Is that her backpack ? Yes , it is . / No , it isn’t . ‎ ‎3、What’s this in English ? It’s a pen .‎ ‎ How do you spell it ? P---E—N .‎ ‎4、Is this your watch ? Call Alan at 495---3539 .‎ ‎【课堂流程】‎ Setp1 展示学习目标。‎ Setp2 写出所对应的英语单词或短语（用电子白板呈现）：‎ 字典 铅笔 拼写 棒球 电脑 笔记本 ‎ 打电话 打搅一下 失物招领 ‎ Step3 :挑战自我，快速记忆，对桌互查（用电子白板呈现）。‎ ‎1.Is this your pencil ? 这是你的铅笔吗？ Yes, it is. 是，它是。‎ ‎ 2. Is that her dictionary ? 那是她的词典吗？ No,it isn’t. 不，它不是。‎ ‎ 3. What’s this in English ? 这个用英语怎么说？ It’s an eraser. 它是一个橡皮擦。 ‎ How do you spell “eraser”? 你怎样拼写它呢？ E-R-A-S-E-R.‎ ‎ 4. Call Alan at 495-3539. 给艾伦打电话495-3539。‎ ‎ 5. Is that your computer game in the lost and found case? 失物招领箱里的那个电子游戏是你的吗？‎ Step4.Exercises:‎ 一．单项选择 ‎1.-What’s this in English? - ____ an eraser. ‎ A. It’s B. This is C. That’s D. That is ‎ ‎2. Please call me ____ 289-1235. ‎ A.in B. for C. on D. at ‎ ‎3. It’s _____ID card. It’s ____ ID card. ‎ A.a, her B. an, she C. an, her D. a, she ‎ ‎4. This is my good friend Allan Smith. _____ last name is ______. ‎ A. His, Allan B. Her, Allan C. His, Smith D.Her, Smith ‎ ‎5. Is that ________ pencil case? A. he B. him C. his D. he's ‎ ‎6. ______. Is this your pencil case?‎ ‎ A. Sorry B. I'm sorry C. Excuse me D. Hello ‎ ‎7.This is _____clock. It’s _____ English clock.‎ A. a, a B. a, an C. an, an D. an, a ‎8.---____do you spell watch?------W-A-T-C-H ,watch.‎ ‎ A. What B. Who C. How D. Why ‎ ‎9.How _____ you spell it?‎ A. is B. are C. am D.do ‎10.Is that your pen? No,it isn’t. It’s _____ pen.‎ A. he B. I C. she D his 二．补全对话 A: Ann, what’s ______?‎ B: It’s a __________.‎ A: Is it _________ruler?‎ B : No, it_______.‎ A:_______that in English?‎ B: It’s a ________.‎ A:How do you spell it?‎ B: P-E-N-C-I-L.‎ A:______it your pencil? ‎ B:Yes, it is. It’s ______orange pencil. ‎ 三．用适当的介词填空 ‎1、What’s this _____ English?‎ ‎2、Call Lucy ______ 235-8625.‎ ‎3、Here is a set _____ keys.‎ ‎4、Your book is ______the lost and found case.‎ ‎5、Nice _____ meet you.‎ 四．书面表达 ‎.假如你叫Kelsey, 在一所外国语学校学习英语, 昨天你在学校的阅览室中发现了一本笔记本. 请你写一份失物招领,电话号码是:0573-725881. ‎ Found:_________________________‎ ‎_______________________________________________ ___________‎ ‎________________________________________ __________________‎ 假如你叫 ‎ David，你不小心丢了一本词典，现在你想写一个寻物启事。请拾到的同学打电话与你联系，电话号码是：5296432‎ Lost:______________________‎ ‎__________________________ ____________________________‎ ‎_________________________________________ _____________‎ Setp5 总结、整理。‎ Unit3 This is my sister.‎ 课型： 新授课 教师寄语： 宝剑锋从磨砺出，梅花香自苦寒来。‎ ‎ Section A 课前预习 I.预习目标：1.找出介绍自己家庭和朋友的句子，感知介绍自己的家人和朋友。2.理解记忆重点单词和短语（P13---P15）。3。感知理解this that these those等指示代词的用法 。‎ II.预习过程：一、阅读对话、短文，在文中划出下列新词汇：(1)姐、妹：______(2)兄弟_______（3）母亲_______（4）父亲________（5）父或母亲_______（6）（堂）表兄弟_______（7）女儿_______（8）儿子________（9）朋友_______（10）她_______（11）他________（12）这些_______（13）那些________ ‎ 一． 阅读课文（P13---P15），在文中划出下列句子，朗读并翻译：（英译汉）‎ ‎1:Is this your sister?_____ No ,it isn’t _______2:This is my friend._______3:That’s my sister._______‎ ‎4:Is he your brother?______5:Those are my two brothers.______6:These are his brothers._____7:He’s my friend._____‎ 二、 句子破译站：1、This is his sister.这是他的姐姐（妹妹）。These are his sisters.这些是他的姐姐（妹妹）。That is his brother. 那是他的哥哥（弟弟）.Those are his brothers. 那些是他的哥哥（弟弟）点拨:①： This is…是当场介绍人的用语。These are…是This is…的复数形式。与此相应，That is…与Those are…也可作介绍语。只不过this指离说话人较近的人或物，意思是“这个”，that指离说话人较远的人或物，意思是“那个”。如： This is my mum and that is my dad. 这是我的妈妈，那是我的爸爸。 This is a pen and that is a pencil. 这是一支钢笔，那是一支铅笔。 ‎ This is 没有缩写形式，that is 可缩写成that’s。 ‎ ‎②these这些，this的复数；those那些,that（那个）的复数.‎ These ， this指空间上离说话人较近，those ,that 指空间上离说话人较远或者不在现场的人或物。Eg: These are my pens.这些是我的钢笔 Those are his pens.那些是他的钢笔。‎ ‎③these those this that 也可作形容词，放在物前（名词）作限定词。意为“这些、那些------”。Eg:These girls are my friends.这些女孩是我的朋友。Those pictures are good.那些画很好。‎ ‎④在回答主语是these或those的疑问句时，通常用they来代替these或those，例:--Are these your erasers?—Yes,they are./No,they aren’t.这些是你的橡皮吗？是的，它们是。不，它们不是。‎ 做一做：（1）用this that these those填空： ① This isn’t my book.________is mine.‎ ‎② What are _________? They are pens.‎ ‎（2）句型转换：① Are these your friends?(否定回答)_______________‎ ‎② Is this your pencil? (否定回答)________________‎ ‎2、These are his friends.这些是他的朋友。‎ 点拨：friends是名词复数，名词有可数与不可数之分，可数名词又分单数和附复数，表示一个人或物的名词为单数，表示两个或两个以上的人或物时为复数，复数变化规则有：见课本P 95‎ 我会做：单数变复数：desk _________ key _________photo_______party_______leaf________‎ ‎3、Is Guo Peng your brother? No,he isn’t 郭鹏是你的弟弟吗？不，他不是。‎ 点拨：本句是一个含有动词be的一般疑问句。陈述句中将be的形式am，is，are，提至句首表示疑问，句号改为问号，其他语序不变。 对主语是人（单数）的一般疑问句作简略回答时，用相应的he 或she代替Eg:--Is Zhao Feng your brother?--Yes,he is 赵峰是你的弟弟吗？是的，他是 练一练：-----Is Xiao Fang you sister? (否定回答)----____________________‎ ‎ ----Is Zhang Peng your brother? (否定回答)----____________________‎ ‎ Unit3 Section A 课堂学习 I. 学习目标: 1.能口头介绍自己的家庭和朋友 2.理解会用重点单词。3.学会使用指 II. 教学重点：1.句型 ：Is she your sister ? Yes,she is .No,she isn’t.2.单词： she he he’s =he is aunt 3.名词复数的构成及运用。 ‎ ‎ The First Period ( Section A 1a-----Grammar Focus )‎ III.课堂学习过程：‎ 一、交流检查、情感启动，导入新课:（进一步明确本节课学习目标。）‎ ‎ 1、读单词，让同位听，纠正读音。2、出示卡片，让学生把名词变成复数，复习名词变复数规律。3、限时让学生书写：mother father parents brothers grandmother grandfather friend grandparents sister 检查单词的书写情况。4、利用大卡片纠正读音和识记单词5、1a 图词匹配，交差检查。6、看图介绍人物。This is my sister. These are my parents.‎ 二、新知探究（从“生生互动”到“师生互动”） ‎ ‎1 .弄清1b 2a 2b 听力要求 2.listen twice or three times and complete 1b, 2a, 2b. 3. listen to 1b, 2a and repeat. 4. Read aloud alone or in pairs .(and complete the dialogue .) 5.practise 1c, 2c in pairs.‎ 三． 交流展示：Discuss language diffculties in group to help each other.‎ ‎1 学生找出难点2.组内讨论解决学习疑难 3.班内交流解决 4.教师点拨 四、 重点知识解密： 掌握人称代词 he 、 she 、they. ‎ ‎ he she they 都是人称代词的主格形式，在句中做主语，“he” 指男性的“.他”。“she ”指女性的“她”。“They”指人或物的复数“他们”，当用人称代词询问人时，回答也用人称代词。 eg: Is he your brother? Yes, he is. Is she your sister? No, she isn’t.如疑问句中this, that, these ,those 做主语时，其答语应该根据所指的名词来决定，指人时单数用he, she.复数用they(他们), 指物时单数用it，复数也用they.‎ eg : Are those his books? No, they aren’t. Are these your friends? Yes, they are.‎ 随手一练：Is this Jim? No,_______ isn’t. It’s Dave. Is he Jim? No, ______ isn’t. It’s Dave.‎ 五.当堂检测：‎ ‎（一）．请按要求将下列单词分类。‎ Pencil eraser cousin parent baseball eight zero basketball he these his that your you ‎ ‎1.人物________ 2 人称代词 _________ 3物主代词______ 4运动_________________¬‎ ‎5 数字___________ 6文具¬¬¬¬_________7 指示代词¬¬________‎ ‎（二） A 依据汉语完成句子:‎ ‎1.Kate and Gina are his _________(姐妹) 2.These are my ___________(朋友)‎ ‎3.Look,those are my ____________(兄弟) 4.My__________(双亲) are Peter and Nancy.‎ B 选适当的单词，用其适当形式完成句子。‎ ‎ 1._______?This is my mother. ‎ ‎ 2. These _________ my brothers and sisters 3.__________ is my sister ,Lucy C 汉译英。1.Is that your brother?__________________‎ ‎2. Those are my brothers._____________________‎ ‎（三）．拓展延伸： 让学生口头试着介绍家里的一幅照片，然后写在练习本上。‎ ‎______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ 六．反馈联动，释疑解难，学后反思 ‎ ______________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit3 The Second Period ( Section A part 3-----4 )‎ I． 学习目标 1对含有be 动词的句子进行一般疑问句和否定句进行变化。‎ ‎ 2 对主语是人的一般疑问句进行回答时，变成相对应的代词 ‎ 3 对某一幅图片进行问答活动。‎ II.课堂学习过程：‎ 一． 复习检查： 1.课前限时默写单词短语2.大卡片检查单词短语记忆情况 3 复习检查第一课时主要内容 4.引入操练重点句式、单词、短语。 ‎ 二．情感启动，导入新课 自主学习：‎ ‎1. 3a (1) Read the words of the box (2).Fill in the blanks with the words and repeat the dialogue 2 3b Repeat the dialogue of 3a and work in pairs 3.3c ‎ ‎4.①讲授当主语是人的一般疑问句在进行肯、否问答时，变成相对应的代词：Guo Peng he Lucy she eg: Is Lucy your sister? Yes, she is /No, she isn’t ‎ ‎ ②Play a game . One write a name on the blackborad the others Guess Who she /he is.‎ 三、 交流展示：Discuss language diffculties in group to help each other.‎ ‎1. 学生自己发现问题提出。2 小组内讨论解决学习疑难3 班内交流解决4 教师解释点拨 四、新知探究:重点知识解密：‎ ‎ 认识肯定句，否定句和一般疑问句及答语。 He’s my friend . （肯定句）‎ ‎ 试试看 1. 变成否定句 He _____ my friend .‎ ‎ 你能行 2 .变成疑问句 ____ he your (注意这个词) friend ? (问句中有问号)‎ ‎ ____, he _____ . _______, he _______.‎ ‎ 对应联系：Guo Peng is my brother 变成否定句______ ____ _____ ______.‎ ‎ 变成疑问句______ _____ ______ ______? ‎ ‎ 并做肯定和否定回答 ____,_____ _____. _____,______ ______.‎ 五、训练巩固： 1、单项选择。‎ ‎（1）---Who’s that? ----I think________Jeff. A he B it’s C its ‎ ‎(2) Look! These are my ________ A pencils B pencil C the pencils ‎ ‎(3) ---Is Li Hong your sister? -----__________A No,it isn’t B Yes,he is C No,she isn’t ‎(4)_________my parents. A This is B These are C That is ‎ ‎(5)-----Is Zhang Bin ________friend? ---------No, he is my brother A my B you C your ‎2、用所给的正确形式填空。‎ ‎（1） This is ____sister. (I) （2）These _____Gina and Lisa. (be)（3）These are his ____ (friend) （4） Are these her ____ ? (cousin)（5）John ______ her son. (be)‎ 六．拓展延伸：1、(按要求改写句子)（1）Is that a dictionary?（改为复数句）______________（2）These are photos（改为单数句）________________‎ ‎2、对话排序。根据所给句子排列出符合逻辑的对话。‎ ‎1. Mum, this is my friend Eric. 2. Nice to meet you.3. Nice to meet you, too. 4. And Eric, this is my Mum, Mrs Lopez. ________‎ 七、自学问题记载 通过自学，你对本课的重点、难点已经有了一定的理解和掌握，对下一步的学习你会充满信心。但是，在自学过程中你还有没理解或存在疑惑的地方吗？请记载下来，让老师来帮助你吧。_____________________________________________________________‎ Unit3 Section B 课前预习 I. 自学目标揭示：1.理解、记忆（P16--P17）新的单词和短语。2、初步读懂家谱树3、理解书信书写格式。4.自如介绍自己的家庭和朋友 II.预习过程：‎ 一、情感启动，阅读课本（P16—P17），在文中找出下列新词汇：（1）儿子______（2）堂（表）兄弟______（3）堂（表）姐妹_______（4）女儿_______（5）叔、伯、姑父_______（6）照片、图画_______（7）相片、照片___________（8）这里__________‎ 二、 阅读课本（P16—P17），在文中找出下列短语，注意记一下哦！（1）家谱__________（2）为-----而感谢___________（3）你家的照片___________‎ 三、阅读P17 3a尝试翻译以下句子。1.感谢你家的相片________________________‎ ‎2.这是我家的相片________________________3.这是我的兄弟-----托尼___________________‎ 四、句子破译站：‎ ‎1.Thanks for the photo of your family.谢谢你的全家福 点拨：（1）此句中Thanks是感谢用语。Thanks是名词，常用复数形式，加“s”是加强感谢的语气，不能省略。 thanks 常与介词for连用，表示感谢的原因。thanks for------意为“因----而感谢”是礼貌用语，常用于接受别人帮助，得到别人赞扬后表示谢意，for后接感谢单内容，可以是名词，也可以是动词---ing形式。thanks for-----相当于thank sb for------- ‎ eg: Thanks for your letter=Thank you for your letter.谢谢你的信。‎ Thanks for giving me a book.感谢给我一本书。‎ 露一小手：Thanks for_________(help) me.‎ ‎(2) the photo of your family =your family photo 你家单全家福。句中of 用来表示名词（通常是无生命的事物）单所有关系，即所有格；而有生命的事物的所有格用’s形式，eg:the legs of the table 桌子腿；Tom’s pen汤姆的钢笔。‎ ‎(3)photo是“照片”的意思，它的复数是photos。picture也可以用来表示“照片”。of后面的名词表示照片上是什么或是谁。如： ‎ That is a photo of me. 这是我的照片。 It’s a photo of Mary. 这是玛丽的照片。 ‎ 如果of后面用的是名词性物主代词，就表示一种所属关系，则照片上可能不一定是某人的像，而强调这张照片是这个人所有照片中的一张。如： ‎ This is a photo of Jim’s=This is one of Jim’s photos. 这是一张吉姆的照片。 ‎ ‎(照片上的人可能是吉姆，也可能不是吉姆。) ‎ ‎2.Here is my family photo.这是我家的全家福。‎ 点拨：本句子是倒装句（即把部分句子成分倒装至主句之前单句子）句子单真正的主语是my family photo.为单数形式，所以be动词用is ，如果要是复数形式，谓语也应用复数形式。‎ Eg: Here are the photos of my family ‎ 填一下：Here ________(come) a dog. ‎ ‎ Here ________(be) some books ‎ 五、当堂检测：‎ 用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎ 1．Here ______(be ) some _____ ( photo ) of my cat .‎ ‎ 2. I _____ (be )in Class 4 Grade 2.‎ ‎ 3.Tom ____ (be) my good friend .His family _____ ( be ) all in China now .‎ ‎ 4.My aunt has two _____ (son ) and a _____(daughter) ‎ ‎ 5.I have two _______ ( dictionary),a Chinese _____ (dictionary ) and an English____ (dictionary)‎ ‎ ‎ Unit3 Section B 课堂学习 ‎ The First Period ( Section B 1a-----2c )‎ I.学习目标:‎ ‎ 1.掌握所学单词短语 2.读懂家谱树3.自如介绍自己的家庭和朋友4 掌握书信的格式 ‎ II.课堂学习过程：‎ 一、交流检查、情感启动，导入新课:：‎ ‎1.利用大卡片检查学生单词短语记忆情况2 限时默写son.cousin daughter uncle picture. Photo here 3. Read the family tree . Fill in the blanks with words of the box 1a 二．情感启动，导入新课：（进一步明确本节课学习目标。） 教师出示自己家的照片，为同学们介绍自己的家谱 ‎1.学生写出自己家的家谱树。2.弄清2a、2b的听力要求。 3 .listen twice or three times and complete 2a. 2b.4. listen to 2a. 2b and repeat. 5. read aloud alone or in pairs .(and complete the dialogue .) 6.Repeat 2c first and practise 2c in pairs.(用学生各自的相片）‎ 三、新知探究： 1. 了解家谱，试绘制自己家的家谱并向同学们介绍自己的家人。‎ ‎ 2.aunt 和uncle 都可以放在姓名之前作称呼语用，这时，首字母要大写. Aunt Liu 刘阿姨 ‎3.系动词 be 的用法： 系动词be 在一般现在时中有三种形式，既am .is .are .他们的用法是am用于第一人称单数（I） ；is 用语第三人称单数；are 用于第二人称和所有的复数。‎ ‎ 我（I ） 你们（you ）用 are ;is 用于 他（ he） .她(she) .它(it )；凡是复数用are .‎ ‎4.一般现在时： 它表示现在的状态，其中 be 用其一般现在时形式即：am. is. are.其句型结构的肯定式.否定式.和疑问式 肯定式 ： 主+ 系+ 表。 否定式： 在be 后加 not ‎ ‎ 疑问式： be 提前至句首（ 系+主 + 表）‎ 四、 交流展示：Discuss language diffculties in group to help each other.‎ ‎1. 学生说出难点 2. 组内讨论解决学习疑难 ‎ ‎2. 以小组为单位进行展示 4. 教师进行点拨。‎ 五．反馈联动，释疑解难，学后反思 ‎ _____________________________________________________________________‎ 六、 训练、巩固、提高： （1）单项选择：‎ ‎（1） My uncle Tony and my father are ______ A brother B sisters C brothers ‎（2） Jim is my uncle’s son. He is my _________A brother B sister C cousin ‎（3） _________this family photo,please. A See B Look at C Read ‎（4） _______! This is my brother. A Look B See C Look at ‎（5） This is my father______that is my uncle. A or B but C and ‎ （2）.补全对话：‎ ‎ A: What_______________ this ? B: It’s a photo___________my family.‎ ‎ A: Who is this _____________? B: _________ is my sister.‎ ‎ A: What’s____________ name? B: Linda A: Are these your__________? B: Yes,they are. Father is tall but mother isn’t.‎ A: Is the boy your_______? B: Yes, ________ is.‎ A；Oh ,your family _____is very nice. B：_________________________-‎ 七、拓展延伸：（活学活用）‎ ‎ 让学生自己介绍一下自己家的一幅相片 ‎______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ Unit3 The Second Period ( Section B 3a-----part 4 )‎ II.课堂学习过程：‎ 一、复习检查、情感启动，导入新课:：‎ ‎1.课前限时默写整课单词短语2.大卡片检查单词短语记忆情况3.学生口头介绍家庭相片导出3a 给艾玛的一家画像4.引入.操练重点句式、单词、短语。 ‎ 二、引入呈现。自主学习：‎ ‎1.Read carefully and draw a picture of Emma’s family 2.Read the letter loudly and repeat it ‎ ‎3.Think of how to write a letter(注意书信的书写格式) ‎ ‎4.Look at the family photo.Write about the peop;e in the photo(3b) Write and read.‎ 三 交流展示：Discuss language diffculties in group to help each other.‎ ‎1.个人提出难点 2.小组内交流讨论解决、巩固操练3.班内交流、展示、拓展4.教师点拨 四 训练、巩固、提高：‎ ‎ 1、翻译句子：（1）谢谢你的全家福。 __________（2）这是我的全家福。 ___________‎ ‎（3）这是我的兄弟-------托尼。 __________ （4）请看我的全家福。 _____________‎ ‎2、完形填空： ‎ This is a 1 Tom’s family. It’s a beautiful photo.This man 2 Mr Green. 3 is Tom’s father. 4 woman is Mrs Green. 5 is Tom’s mother. Who 6 this boy and this girl? The 7 is Tom, Mr Green’s son. The girl is Kate. Mr Green’s 8 .Kate is 9 sister.Tom and Kate 10 brother and sister.‎ ‎( ) 1 A book B photo C map D dictionary ‎( ) 2 A is B am C are D be ‎( ) 3 A She B Her C He D His ‎( )4 A A B An C These D This ‎( ) 5 A She B Her C He D His ‎( ) 6 A is B am C love D are ‎( ) 7 A girl B boy C boys D girls ‎( ) 8 A cousin B son C sister D daughter ‎( ) 9 A Tom B Toms C Tom’s D of Tom ‎( ) 10 A do B is C be D are ‎3、句型转换 ‎1)She is your sister. (变一般问句并做肯定回答) 2)Those are my brothers. (同第一题)‎ ‎_______________________________ _____________________________‎ ‎3)Is that an old map? (变陈述句) 4)I’m Alice Green. (变一般问句)‎ ‎______________________________ _____________________________‎ ‎5) Is it a book ? (变复数) 6)This is a pencil in English. (对画线部分提问)‎ ‎____________________________ _______________________________________‎ ‎7）Is this a pen ? (做肯定回答) 8） Those are your watches.(变单数)‎ ‎______________________________ _____________________________________‎ ‎9）They are my good friends. (变单数) 10）This is my brother (变一般疑问句,并做回答)‎ ‎__________________________________ __________________________________________‎ 五、 拓展延伸： 给远方的朋友Emmma回信，介绍你的家庭。‎ ‎_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ Unit 3 单元语言知识综合训练和综合运用课 ( selfcheck )‎ 一． 语言知识综合练习。1.根据句义和首字母填空。‎ ‎（1）My mother’s brother is my u (2) Your aunt’s d is your cousin.‎ ‎(3) My parent’s s is my brother.(4) Your father’s s is your aunt.‎ ‎(5) Mary is a nice girl. She is my f .‎ ‎ 2.依汉语写单词。（1）Look! This （图画）is very nice.‎ ‎（2）My （叔叔）is thirty—seven.（3）Is your father a （医生）?‎ ‎（4） （感谢）for your help.（5）My （爷爷奶奶）love me very much.‎ ‎3.按要求改写句子。（1） Is that a dictionary?（改为复数句）_______________‎ ‎（2）These are photos.（改为单数句）_______（3）These are his parents.（改为一般疑问句）________‎ ‎（4）Is he your cousin?（肯定回答）_________（5）Is Linda his sister?（否定回答）___________‎ ‎4.单项选择。‎ ‎(1) Thanks your help. A for B of C from D to ‎(2) Draw a picture your family. A to B of C from D for ‎(3) are my parents and is my brother. ‎ A This ,this B This ,that C These , that D These ,the ‎ （4）Is Mike son? A he B you C she D her ‎（5）Cindy and Lucy sisters. A am B is C are D be ‎ ‎（6）Is your friend? A he B his C you D her ‎（7）---Are these your______?----No,they are my ________.‎ A sister; cousin B sisters; cousins C sisters; cousin D sister; cousins ‎（8）---Is this your brother? -------__________ A No,it is B Yes, it is C Yes ,he is D Yes,this is ‎ ‎（9）Is ________ your sister? A you B he C she D her ‎（10）----Are ___Mr Li? ----No,____A you; I not B she; isn’t C you; I’m not D she ; she not 二．语言综合运用：1、完形填空：‎ ‎ Hello! I’m Mary Brown. I’m 1 English girl. Look! Here 2 a photo 3 my family. This is 4 sister. 5 name is Mona. 6 is in Class One,Grade Eight. 7 is my uncle. His 8 name is Bill. His 9 is Tony Brown.He is a student,too. Tony is my 10 .‎ ‎( )(1) A a B an C the D 不填 ( ) (2) A is B am C are D be ‎( )(3) A for B in C at D of ( )(4) A me B you C my D she ‎( )(5) A Your B Her C His D My ( ) (6) A She B I C He D These ‎( )(7) A Those B This C It D These ( ) (8) A last B first C family D one ‎( )(9) A daughter B sister C mother D son( )(10) A cousin B aunt C brother D uncle ‎2.阅读下列短文，将人名及其身份填在图画的相应方框内 This is my family.My grandpa's name is Harry Brown.My grandma's name is Jean Brown.My father's name is Jeff Brown.My mother's name is Helen Brown.Jeff and Helen are my parents.I have a sister.Her name is Kate Brown.My name is Tom Brown.I am ten.My sister is eight.‎ Tom’s Family Tree ‎ ‎ 按上图回答下列问题 ‎1.How old is Tom Brown? 2.Is that girl (E) his sister? ‎______________________ ____________________________‎ ‎3.Is Helen Brown his grandmother?4.What’s his grandmother’s name? ‎________________________ ________________________________ ‎5.Is Jeff Brown his brother? ____________________________‎ ‎3.连词组句 (请注意句后的标点符号) ‎1.sister,this,your,is ______________________? ‎2.is not,your eraser,that______________________ ‎3.friends,his,are,those ______________________? ‎4.are,brothers,my,these______________________. ‎4、完成下列对话并表演 ‎ ‎ ‎1. TOM: Dad,________ ______ my friend,Lei Hao. Lei Hao,this is my _________. LEI HAO: Good morning,Mr.Brown. FATHER: _________ _________,Lei Hao.How do you do? LEI HAO: _________ _______ ________ ______? FATHER: Please sit down. LEI HAO: _________ ________ _______ _______.‎ ‎2. TOM: Kate,_________ ________ my classmate,Lei Hao. LEI HAO: Hello,Kate! KATE: ___________! _________ ________ _________?‎ LEI HAO: I'm fine.Thank you._________ _________? KATE: I'm OK. 五、根据图示，填入下列短文中所缺的词（每空一词，首字母已给出） ‎ This is a p 1 of Xie Li's family.The girl i 2 Xie Li.She's a s 3 .This is Xie Kai.He's Xie Li's b 4 .He and his s 5 are in the same school.Their f 6 is Mr.Xie.He's a teacher. The w 7 is Xie Li and Xie Kai's m 8 .H 9 name is Mrs.Xie.She's a teacher,t 10 .Their family is a good family. ‎1._________ 2.________ 3._______ 4.______  5._______‎ ‎ 6._________ 7._______ 8._______  9.________ 10.________ Unit4 where’s my backpack?‎ ‎ 课型： 新授课 ‎ 教师寄语： 细节决定成败，态度决定一切。‎ ‎ Section A 课前预习 I.预习目标：1.了解where引导的特殊疑问句 ‎2. 了解谈论位置关系的介词 in under behind ‎ ‎3 理解物品的名词。‎ II.预习过程：‎ 一、 阅读课本（P19----P21），在文中找出下列新词汇：(1)在哪儿：______(2)桌子_______（3）床_______（4）梳妆台________（5）书橱、书柜_______（6）沙发_______（7）椅子_______（8）抽屉________（9）植物_______（10）在----下_______（11）他（她、它）们________（12）在---上_______（13）知道、了解________ ‎ ‎ 注出音标和词义，并试着朗读几遍，将不会的圈起来。‎ 二、阅读课文（P19---P21），在文中划出下列句子，朗读并翻译：（英译汉）‎ ‎1:Where’s my backpack?_______________________ ‎ ‎2:It’s under the table..______________________‎ ‎3:Where are my books?_________________________‎ ‎4:They are on the sofa___________________‎ ‎5:Is the baseball on the sofa?___________________‎ ‎6:No,it isn’t.It’s under the chair._______________‎ 三、句子破译站：‎ ‎1、Where’s my backpack?‎ 点拨①：where 询问位置，如果我们想询问某样物品的位置，用“Where’s ------？”或“Where’re----------”(-----在哪里？)句型，Where是疑问词，表示“哪里”。‎ Eg:-----Where’s the bag? 书包在哪里？-------It’s on the desk..它在桌子上。‎ ‎-------Where are your books? 你的书在哪里？-------They’re on the chair. 它们在椅子上。在别人问及有关where 的问题时，如果你不知道，可以说sorry,I don’t know ‎②是用“Where’s ------？”还是用“Where’re----------”(-----在哪里？)句型，取决于后面的物，如果是单数用“Where’s ------？”如果是复数则用“Where’re----------”(-----在哪里？)句型，Eg:Where’s my pen? Where are my pens?‎ 练一练：‎ ‎（1）我的篮球在哪儿？___________________________‎ ‎（2）他在箱子里。________________________________-‎ ‎(3) Where____________(be) your ruler?‎ ‎(4) Where ____________(be) your books?‎ ‎2、on 、under和in 的用法：‎ 点拨：on 表示“在-------上”，under表示“在------下”，in表示“在----里”‎ ‎ Eg: Your backpack is on the bed 你的书包在床上。‎ ‎ My keys are in the pencil case.我的钥匙在文具盒里。‎ 翻译一下：‎ ‎（1）我的钢笔在盒子里。______________‎ ‎（2）我的书在椅子下面。_____________‎ ‎（3）我的背包在桌子上。______________‎ ‎ Unit4 Section A 课堂学习 I.学习目标: 1.会问、答物品的位置 2.理解in on under behind的用法。3.能说出物品的名称。‎ ‎ The First Period ( Section A 1a-----Grammar Focus )‎ II.课堂学习过程：一、交流检查、情感启动，导入新课：1、读单词，让同位听，纠正读音。2、限时让学生书写：where table bed dresser bookcase sofa chair drawer plant under they on know bag ‎ ‎ 检查单词的书写情况。3、利用大卡片纠正读音和识记单词 注意单词的音和检查单词的记忆情况。4、1a 图词匹配，交差检查。5、看图谈论物品的位置。Where’s my backpack? It’s under the table.Where are my books? They are on the sofa. Where’s my baseball? It’s in the backpack.‎ 二． 自主学习、新知探究：1 .弄清1b 2a 2b 听力要求2 Listen twice or three times and complete 1b, 2a, 2b. (Don’t look at the book)3. Listen to 1b, 2a 2b again with book and repeat. 4. Read aloud and repeat 1c 2c5 Practise 1c, 2c in pairs.6.Let them read Grammar Focus. ‎ 三、 句子破译站：1．Where is/are…? ……在哪里？点拨：这是询问物品位置或方位的一种简单的提问方式，句中动词be的形式是根据句中主语的单复数（或不可数名词）而确定的。如：Where is Lucy’s coat（可数名词单数）？Lucy的大衣在哪里？Where are the balls（可数名词复数）？球在哪里？Where is the coke（不可数名词）？可乐在哪里？‎ ‎2．Please take these things to your brother. 请将这些东西带给你弟弟。‎ 点拨：（1）在英语中表示命令或请求的句子为祁使句。祈使句常由动词原形开头，省略主语you。有时为了表示客气可在句首或句尾加please。please放在句尾时，要用逗号隔开。如：‎ Please stand up请起立。Sit down, please. 请坐下。（2）take…to…译为“把……带/拿到……”。take是动词，译为“拿走，带去”，to…是介词，表示方向。如：Please take the broom to the door. 请把这扫帚带到门边去。Take this photo to Li Lei. 把这张照片带给李雷。‎ 四、 交流展示：Discuss language diffculties in group to help each other.‎ ‎1 学生找出难点2.组内讨论解决学习疑难 3.班内交流解决 4.教师点拨 五、反馈联动，释疑解难，学后反思：___________________________________________‎ 六、训练巩固：A 补全单词 1.-W________ is my book? It’s on the desk.‎ ‎2.My keys are in the d________. You can’t see it.‎ ‎3.----Where is the soccer ball?-------oh, it’s u________ her desk.‎ ‎4.________（在哪里）your key? O n the table. 5.A book is on the __________（沙发）.‎ B 翻译短语1. 在椅子上 ________ 2. 在抽屉里____________3. 在床下______________‎ ‎4. 在书橱上____________ 5. 在沙发上__________6. under the bed____________‎ 七．拓展延伸：阅读下列对话, 并编出两个新对话 LEI HAO: Excuse me, Liu Hai. Where is my cat?I can't find it. Do you know?‎ XIE KAI: No, I don't. Is it on the chair? LEI HAO: No, I can't see it. ‎ XIE KAI: Is it behind the door?LEI HAO: No, it isn't. ‎ XIE KAI: Oh, I see it! It's there!It's under the desk. ‎ LEI HAO: Yes, you're right. I see it, too. Thanks. ‎ ‎ ‎ Unit4 The Second Period ( Section A part 3-----4 )‎ II． 学习目标： 1、会谈论物品的位置 2、会对不确定物品的位置进行猜测 II.课堂学习过程：‎ 一、复习检查、情感启动，导入新课：1. 课前限时默写单词短语 2. 大卡片检查学生单词、短语记忆情况 3 复习检查第一课时主要内容 ，让学生口头问答物品的位置，‎ Eg:A: Wher is /are--------?B: It’s /They’re-------------‎ 二．新知探究、自主学习：‎ ‎1. 3a First,let the students look at the picture and read the sentences.Then number the sentence and check. 2 .3b Repeat the dialogue of 3a and let them ask and answer.(可以尽可能的提供一些场景)3. 3c Play a game (首先将游戏的一些规则讲清，然后让学生进行游戏。)‎ 三 交流展示：Discuss language diffculties in group to help each other.‎ ‎1. 学生自己发现问题提出。2. 小组内讨论解决学习疑难3. 班内交流展示4. 教师解释点拨 四、句子破译站：‎ Can you bring some things to school? 你能将一些东西拿到学校来吗？‎ ‎（1）can为情态动词，后面接动词原形。Can you…？（你能……‎ 吗？）是一种客气、礼貌地征询对方许可的句型。如： Can I have a look at your picture? 我可以看一下你的照片吗？‎ ‎（2）句中的some是形容词，译为“一些”，可以修饰可数名词也可以修饰不可数名词。有同义词any。some一般用于肯定句中，any用于疑问句或否定句中。但是，表示邀请别人或向别人提出要求时，为了得到肯定回答，在一般疑问句中可用some。如：‎ Would you like some fish? 你想吃鱼吗？ ‎ Can you give me some apples? 你能给我些苹果吗？‎ 五、反馈联动，释疑解难，学后反思：________________________________________________‎ 六 、训练、巩固、提高： 1、单项选择。‎ ‎（1）---Is your photo in the drawer?---___ A Yes, I am B No ,it is C Yes, it is D No,I’m not ‎ ‎(2) ---____ my baseball?----It’s under the chair. A Where are B Where’s C What is D What are ‎(3) ---____under the tree? ----No,they aren’t.A Where are B What is C Are they D Is it ‎ ‎(4)A computer ______on the desk.A are B is C am D have ‎ ‎(5) A notebook and eraser______in the pencil case. A are B is C am D have ‎(6)--__ under the desk? ---No,they aren’t.A Where are B What’s C Are those rulers D Is the math book ‎(7)----_______ behind_______? --------My alarm clock(闹钟).‎ A What’s ; the chair B Where’s ;the chairC What are ; the chair D Where are ; a chair ‎(8) My computer game is _______ the drawer and my books are _____the sofa.‎ A on on B in in C on in D in on ‎ ‎(9) Look ! This is a picture_______ my bedroom._______ bedroom is clean.‎ A of , A B of , The C for ,A D for , The ‎ ‎(10) ------_____ is the ball ?-------I think it’s under the table.A How B Where C What D Who ‎2、连词组句 (请注意大小写和标点符号) 1. Lucy's baseball, your baseball, that is not, it is ‎ ‎ 2. the bird, the name of, what is 3. American girls, Lucy and Lily, are ‎  4. on the blackboard, can you, see, a bird 5. Tom's backpack, on, is, bed, his ‎3、拓展延伸：(按要求改写句子)（1）、 They’re my CDs(改为单数句) ________ my __________‎ ‎（2）、 The keys are in the drawer?（对划线部分提问) _________ ________ the keys?‎ ‎（3）. His baseball is under the table.(变为一般疑问句) _______ his baseball ______ the table?‎ Unit4 Section B 课前预习 I.预习目标：1.理解、记忆（P22—P23）新的单词和短语。2、初步读懂便条3、巩固书写格式。‎ II.预习过程：一、 阅读课本（P22—P23），在文中找出下列新词汇：‎ ‎（1）数学______（2）闹钟______（3）光盘_______（4）录像；视频_______（5）录音带_______（6）帽子_______（7）拿走、带到___________（8）东西、物__________（9）能、会、可以 （10）拿来、取来、带来 （11）一些、若干 （12）需要 （13）地板、地面 （14）房间 （15）书桌、课桌 ‎ 二 阅读课本（P22—P23），在文中找出下列短语。（1）电脑游戏__________（2）数学书______________（3）身份证__________（4）在----抽屉里 ‎ 三、阅读P23 3a尝试翻译以下句子。1.请把这些东西带给你姐姐_____________‎ ‎2.你能把一些东西带到学校吗？_______________3.这儿是我的房间___________________‎ 四、重点解密：‎ ‎1.bring和 take 点拨：(1) bring意思为“带来，带到，带给”，表示“把----从远方带过来”。Eg:Bring me the book,please. 请把书给我带来。 Could you bring me that coat?请你把我的外套带来好吗？‎ ‎(2)take 意思为“拿走、带走”，表示“把----从此处拿走，拿到、带到其他地方去”。 bring和 take 为对应词，两者方位相反。‎ Eg: Would you please take the desk to the classroom?请你把这个桌子搬到教室去好吗？‎ You mustn’t take the book out of the readingroom你不可以把这本书带出阅览室去。‎ ‎2.I need my hat. 我需要我的帽子。点拨：need 为动词，意为“需要”后可直接加物。Eg:He needs a ‎ book.他需要一本书。 They need a house. 它们需要一栋房子。‎ ‎3、Here is my room. 我的房子在这儿。点拨：本句为倒装句，主语为my room。‎ Eg: Here are some books.这里有几本书。‎ 练一练：A用bring和 take 填空。1.I need a book.Can you ______ a book to me.‎ ‎2.Please_______ the things to your sister. She needs them.3.Please____ your books to me tomorrow.‎ B用am is are 填空. (1) Lucy_________ a girl.(2) Here _________somg water.‎ ‎(3) I _____ a student. (4) Here ______ some pens.‎ 五、句子破译站： There are pictures on the wall. 墙上挂着画。‎ 点拨：本句是一个There be句型。‎ ‎（1）There be句型主要用以表达“某处（某时）有某人（某物）。”其基本结构为“There be＋某物（某人）＋某地（某时）”其中there是引导词，没有词义；主语是be后面的名词，be是谓语动词，在一般现在时中be只用is和are两种形式。‎ 下面这首歌诀可帮你巧记there be句型结构：There be放句首，主语跟在后。地、时放句末，强调置前头。如：There is a book on the desk. ‎ 有时为了强调地点，也可把介词短语放在句首。如：On the desk there is a book.‎ ‎（2）There be句型中的be动词如何确定呢？请先看看下面这首歌诀：‎ Be动词，有三个，am，is还有are。“There be”真特别，不留am只留俩，那就是is还有are。要用is还是are，须看其后的名词是单还是大于、等于俩。若是单数或不可数名词用is，否则就用are。如：There is a tree behind the house ‎ There is some water（水）in the bottle（瓶子）.‎ There are some pears in the box.‎ 注意：如果“be”后的主语是由and连接的两个或两个以上的名词，那么be的形式要遵循“远亲不如近邻”的原则。也就是说，“be”的形式是由与它最近的那个名词来确定的。若那个名词是单数或不可数名词要用is，是复数就用are。如：There is a book and some pens on the floor.‎ ‎ Unit4 Section B 课堂学习 ‎ The First Period ( Section B 1a-----2c )‎ I.学习目标: 1.掌握所学单词短语 2.读懂并会写便条3.巩固书信的书写格式 II.课堂学习过程：‎ 一、交流检查、情感启动，导入新课：‎ ‎1.利用大卡片检查学生单词短语记忆情况 ‎2 限时默写 match alarm clock CD video tape hat 二．新知探究、自主学习：‎ ‎1.Read the words of 1a. Match and check.At last,repeat the words.2.Look at the picture of 1a and write down all the things you remember.3 .Repeat 1c first and then practice 1c in pairs.4.弄清2a 2b听力要求5. listen twice to do 2a.. 6. Listen twice again to do 2b 7.Read the dialogue and repeat it.‎ 三、交流展示：Discuss language diffculties in group to help each other.‎ ‎1、学生说出难点2、组内讨论解决学习疑难3、以小组为单位进行展示4、教师进行点拨。‎ 四、句子破译站：‎ I have a baseball. It’s on the floor, between the bookcase and the desk.我有一只棒球，棒球在书架与书桌之间的地板上。‎ 点拨：（1）定冠词the用在名词前，表示特指两方都知道的人或物。如：the bookcase指的是两人都看到的那个书架。the desk指的是双方都看到的那张书桌。不定冠词用在名词前指第一次提到的某人或某物，不定冠词具有“某一个”的意思，但并不强调数量，如第一次提到的a baseball。当再次提到这个人或物时应该用定冠词，表示特指第一次提到的那个人或物。如：‎ ‎①I have a new book. 我有一本新书。Can I look at the new book? 我可以看看那本新书吗？‎ ‎（the new book是指第一次提到的a new book）‎ ‎②Your book is on the teacher’s desk. 这里的desk指两个人都知道的那个桌子。‎ ‎（2）between…and…意思是“在……和……中间”，如：I sit between Lily and Lucy.我坐在莉莉和露茜之间。I can come here between seven and eight. 我七点钟和八点钟之间能来。‎ 注意：between后面接人称代词时，应用宾格。如：‎ The woman between her and me is our English teacher. 在我和她之间的女士是我们的英语老师。‎ 五、训练、提高、巩固：‎ ‎1、句型转换 ‎（1）This is my sister’s room.(改为否定句)This________ _________ my sister’s room.‎ ‎(2) There are some apples on the tree.(改为一般疑问句)_______ there _______ apples on the tree?‎ ‎(3) Those are some English books.(改为单数句)_______ _______ English ________.‎ ‎(4) Her hat is behind the chair. (对划线部分提问)_________ ________ her hat?‎ ‎2、综合填空。‎ This is our classroom. It’s not _________,but it’s very nice. The walls are white and the desks and chairs are new. On the wall is a _________and we can know the time. There are some flowers.On the teacher’s desk_______ are for our_______,Miss Guo.She is a________ teacher and we all_____ her.‎ 六、拓展延伸：‎ ‎ 让学生编一个寻问物品位置的一个对话。‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ‎ Unit4 The Second Period ( Section B 3a-----part 4 )‎ II.课堂学习过程：‎ 一、复习检查、情感启动，导入新课：‎ ‎1.课前限时默写整课单词短语2.大卡片检查单词短语的读音及记忆情况3.就物品的位置，让学生进行口头问答活动。‎ 二、新知探究、自主学习：1.Read the letter carefuully and draw the missing things in the picture .2.Read the letter loudly and repeat it 3.Look at the picture of 3b.Fill in the blanks. Check ,read and repeat it.‎ ‎4.Read 4 Groupwork and repeat it.Describe room.‎ 三 交流展示：Discuss language diffculties in group to help each other.‎ ‎1.个人提出难点 2.小组内交流讨论解决 3.班内交流展示 4.教师点拨 四、工具箱：1．介词in，on，behind和under ‎（1）in：“在……中”、“在……里面”，通常表示某一空间里。如：in China在中国?? in Macao在澳门 in the box在盒子里此外，in还可用于表示时间、表示用什么语言或者表示衣着。‎ 如：in 2003在2003年in the morning/afternoon在上午/下午 in English 用英语　 in the hat戴着帽子的 ‎（2）on：“在……上面”，有接触面。如：‎ on the desk 在桌子上　　on the wall 在墙上　　on the blackboard 在黑板上 此外，on还可指具体时间，也可与名词一起构成介词短语。如：‎ on Monday 星期一　　on duty 值日，值班 ‎（3）behind：“在……后面”。如：‎ behind the door 在门后　　behind the desk 在书桌后 ‎（4）under：“在……下面”。如：‎ under the tree 在树下　　under the bed 在床下 注意：以上所列出的表示位置的介词短语都可用来回答以where引导的特殊疑问句。如：‎ ‎①Where is the ball? 那球在哪儿？‎ It’s under the chair. 在那张椅子下。‎ ‎②Where are the maps? 那些地图在哪里？‎ They are on the wall. 它们在墙上。‎ 五、 训练、巩固、提高：‎ ‎ 1、根据汉语提示填上单词或短语 ‎ （1）I _____________(需要)some Chinese books.‎ ‎（2）Please __________(带走) these new books to your classroom.‎ ‎（3）We have a new ___________(梳妆台)‎ ‎（4）I put my books_____________________(在书橱上)‎ ‎(5) Can you ____________(拿来) me a pencil?‎ ‎(6) Are they ____________？(在床口)‎ ‎2、选方框中的单词补全短文，有两个是多余的：‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Hello! This is _______ room. In my room there is a bed, a desk_____ a chair.My bed is ____ to the desk. My shoes and soccer ball_____ under the bed. There are _____ pictures on the wall. They’re very nice. Oh, there is a clock and a map on the wall ,too ‎ ‎ Unit 4 单元语言知识综合训练和综合运用课 ( selfcheck )‎ 一、 语言知识综合练习。‎ ‎1、根据句义和首字母填空。‎ ‎（1）My books are all in the b .‎ ‎(2) There are some p on the wall.‎ ‎(3) He is b you and me.‎ ‎(4) I n some books.‎ ‎(5) Can you b me a pen ?‎ ‎(6) Please t the new books to your room.‎ ‎(7) ----____________ my pen ?-------It’s on the desk.‎ ‎(8) The v tape is on the table.‎ ‎(9) My keys is in the d .‎ ‎(10) Here is my small r ,but it’s very nice.‎ ‎ 2.单项选择。‎ ‎（1）What’s that _______ English? A in B at C on D for ‎ ‎（2）---Where is ______ key to my bike, Jim? -----It’s in your room.‎ ‎ A a B the C an D ‎ ‎（3）Their CDs ______ the drawer. A between B under C in D next to ‎（4）Her shoes are ____ the bed. A behind B under C on D between ‎（5）.---Is the ball under the tree? -----_______________‎ A Yes, it isn’t B Yes, it’s C No, it isn’t D No, isn’t ‎ ‎(6)------______ this on the table? ---- It’s a pencil. ‎ ‎ A What’s B What C What’re D Where’s ‎(7) Please _____ the books to your room. And _____ your pen to me.‎ A take ,bring B bring ,take C take ,take D bring ,bring ‎(8) I need my dictionary. Can you ____________?‎ A bring me it B take me it C bring it to me D take it to me ‎ ‎(9) _________ my toys. They are new. ‎ ‎ A Here are B Here is C This is D That is ‎ ‎(10) Please _____ the key to your sister. She is at school. A bring B brings C take D to take ‎3.句型转换。‎ ‎（1） Here is my English book （同义句）‎ ‎ My English book __________ here.‎ ‎（2） He has some books in the bookcase.（同义句）‎ ‎__________ __________ some books in the bookcase.‎ ‎（3）Can you bring the ruler to me ?（否定回答）‎ ‎________________________________________‎ ‎（4）The math book is on the dresser（改为复数句）‎ The _______ ________ _______ on the dresser.‎ ‎（5）Those are some English books.（改为单数句）‎ ‎ _________ ________ English _________.‎ 二．语言综合运用：‎ ‎1、Put the apples in its right place. (把苹果放到它合适的位置。)‎ ‎1．Look over there. A math book is __________the playground.‎ ‎2. There is an orange __________the tree.‎ ‎3. How many students are there __________the garden.‎ ‎4. Where is your uncle? He is __________school.‎ ‎5. There are some birds __________the tree.‎ ‎2、完成对话，每空一词。‎ A: Where ____ my book? B: I ____know. ____ it in your backpack?‎ A : No, it ________ B： Is ______ on your desk?‎ A： _______, it isn’t. B： Is _____ on teacher’s desk?‎ A: No, it ________ B: Oh. Look! _____ ______ your desk.‎ A: I see it ,too. Thanks.‎ ‎3、 任务型阅读。‎ Hi, my name is Dave. I have a bedroom. In my bedroom, I have a dresser. I keep my clothes in the dresser. I have an alarm clock on my dresser. I also have a bookcase, a desk,and a chair. I put my pens, ruler and eraser in my desk. My math book is on my desk. .My backpack is under it. Ihave a bed ,too.‎ ‎(1) 写出Dave在卧室里所拥有的物品（至少8个）‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎（2）找出5个介词短语 ‎ (3)Where is the alarm clock?‎ ‎______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎(4)What is under his desk?‎ ‎______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎(5)Where is the ruler?‎ ‎______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎4、书面表达：Look at this picture of Ann’s room, write sentences about where things are. (这是安的房间，写出物品的摆放情况。)（20分）‎ 提示词：(desk ,bed ,picture ,pens ,ruler ,computer ,alarm ,books dresser ,wall ,shoes)‎ ‎ ‎ This is my room. It’s very nice!‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 初一英语上册学案Unit5. Do you have a soccer ball?‎ ‎ Section A 预习案 预习目标：‎ ‎⒈了解学习关于体育项目的词汇 ‎⒉学会用助动词do/does及表达所有关系的动词have/has，对物品所有权进行问答。‎ ‎⒊学会用let’s…提建议 预习过程：‎ ‎⒈预习生词P102 From“have”to class 生词注释：‎ ‎_①soccer ball就是我们平时说的football，但在美国soccer ball与football表示两种不同的足球。football一般指橄榄球。‎ ‎②在阅读或电视上我们会遇到table tennis乒乓球与ping—pong完全相同。‎ ‎⒉把不会的词标记下来_____________________。‎ ‎⒊把课本P¬102 Unit5. section A单词分类。‎ ‎⑾表示体育用品的名称___________ ⑿动词___________________‎ ‎⒀形容词____________________ ⒁两个缩写词及完全形式。‎ ‎⒋看Section A 1a图片中的问词译成汉语。‎ ‎⑴____________________ ⑵____________________‎ 预习练习题 ‎(一)汉译英 ‎⒈你有一个乒乓球吗？是的，我有. __________________________________‎ ‎⒉你有一个乒乓球拍吗？我没有. ____________________________________‎ ‎⒊Tom有一个台脑吗？是的，他有. ___________________________________‎ ‎⒋让我们踢足球吧？ ______________________________________________‎ ‎⒌那听起来不错 __________________________________________________‎ ‎(二)单项选择 ‎（ ）1、______you have a baseball? Yes I________________‎ A.Do have B.does does C.Do do D.Are do ‎( )2、That idea_________good.‎ A.sound B.looks C.listens D.sounds ‎( )3、He________a soccer ball A.doesn’t have B.doesn’t has C.don’t has D.don’t have ‎( )4、______she like playing table tennis? Yes,______‎ A.Does,I do B.Do,I do C.Does,she does ‎( )5.Let’s play ________baseball. A. a B. an C. the ‎ ‎（三）根据句子意思和括号中汉语提示写单词：‎ ‎1.I _____________(看) TV at 7 in the evening.‎ ‎2.Do you ____________ (有) a baseball bat?‎ ‎3.____________ (欢迎) to Shenyang City！‎ ‎4.I want to ____________ (加入) ping-pong club.‎ ‎5.I play basketball in the sport ______________(中心).　 　‎ ‎ 课堂学习案 Section A:The first period （1a----2c）‎ 学习目标：⒈学习体育项目的名称⒉用have讨论物主关系⒊用let’s提出建议 学习过程：‎ 一、交流检查：交流检查课前预习情况⒈同位互相提问听写新词⒉互相检查预习案课后习题 ‎⒊师生互动互问探讨解决预习中存在的问题，可核对答案。4.大卡片检查单词、短语记忆情况。‎ 二、操练重点句型，设计对话黑板板书：‎ You a ping—pongball, He tennis racket , She Volley—ball, They soccer ball Sally basket ball 操练句型：you have…Do you have…yes___/No___ He has… Does he have…yes____/No____‎ 操练方式T—S boys—girls student A—B 三、1a 图图匹配 四．自主学习：1.listen andcomplete 1b. ‎ ‎2.listen again and fill the dialogue:‎ A :Do you _______a __________game? B: No, I ____________.‎ A: Do you have a ping-pong ________? B: Yes, I ____________.‎ ‎3.practise 1c in pairs. 4.Listen twice and complete 2a and 2b. ‎ ‎5.listen again and complete 4 groups of dialogues:‎ ‎（1）A: Do you have a soccer_______, Peter? B: No, I don’t.‎ ‎ A: _____ your brother Alan_________ one? B: Yes, he does.‎ ‎(2) A: I want to _____ _______ . Do you have a basketball? B: Yes, I do.‎ ‎(3) A: Sally, this is my _______, June. B: Hi, June. Nice to _________ you.‎ ‎ C: Nice to meet you , Sally. B: Let’s _____ tennis. Do you have a ________racket, Jane?‎ ‎(4) A: Do you have a __________,Barry? ‎ B:No. I don’t. But my brother does. Let go and _________him.‎ ‎6. Listen and repeat, then read aloud in pairs.‎ ‎7.Practise 2c and grammar focus in pairs with some other replaced words 五、课堂练习（一）翻译句子：⒈你的兄弟有一个乒乓球拍吗？是的，他有。_________‎ ‎⒉他有一个足球，你呢？_________ ‎ ‎⒊Jenny有一台电脑吗？不，她没有。_______‎ ‎⒋他们有一台电视吗？是的，他们有。_____ ‎ ‎⒌我们有一些篮球吗？______‎ ‎(二）连词成句：⒈a,do,ping—pong,you,have,ball_________________________________‎ ‎⒉computer,do a,have,they, _____________________________________‎ ‎⒊a basketball,James,have,does, _____________________________________‎ ‎⒋to,he,play,soccer,ball wants. _____________________________________‎ ‎⒌students,there,some,in,are,the classroom. _________________________________‎ ‎⒍has,the,children,two,family_____________________________________‎ ‎(三)选词填空, 补全对话：‎ Do/does doesn’t/don’t does he have does she have do you have do they have A:__1______a TV? B:Yes,I_____2_____‎ A:___3_____Li Xin have a baseball? B:No,he___4_____‎ A:_____5___a baseball bat? B:No,they___6______‎ A:___7____a sports collection? B:Yes,she____8_______‎ A:__9______a sister? B:Yes,he___10______‎ 课后作业：阅读第1、2篇 Section A: The second period (3a---4)‎ 学习目标：掌握have的否定句型；let’s句型含sound句型……‎ 学习过程：‎ 一、 复习检查：‎ ‎⒈限时默写单词、短语⒉大卡片检查单词、短语记忆情况 ⒊检查课下阅读、核对答案 二、操练Grammar Focus P26‎ 三、 Read 3a silently and fill., then Ss read 3a aloud for some time. ‎ 四、讲解let’s… That sounds…结构，总结I don’t…He doesn’t have否定句型 五 Ss practise 3b in pairs.‎ 六、完成pairwork后设计一个对话让两个同学表演 A：What’s your first/last name? B:________________________________‎ A:What class are you in? B:___________________________‎ A:How old are you? B:__________________________‎ A:How old are you B:_________________________‎ A:Do you have a____________ B:_________________________‎ A:Do you like playing…? B:Yes/No,___________________‎ 七、巩固练习：注：课堂有时间当堂练习，如没时间做为课后作业。‎ ‎ (一)用所给词的正确形式填空 ‎⒈I want_________(play)soccer ball ⒉This idea_________(sound)very good ‎⒊Ann___________(not have)a computer ⒋Let’s_________(play volleyball)‎ ‎⒌_____he_________(has)a tenis racket? ⒍Do you like____________(play)ping—pong ‎（二）句子改写：‎ ‎1.She has a football（一般疑问句，并做否写回答）‎ ‎ ______she______a football? _______she________‎ ‎2.The girls like playing volleyball（否定句） The girls________ _________playing volleyball ‎3.John plays soccer in the sport center(划线提问)___________ _________John________soccer?‎ ‎4.Bill has a tennis racket（否定句） He__________ _______________a tennis racket.‎ ‎5.让我们加入篮球俱乐部（翻译句子） ________________________________‎ ‎6．那听起来好极了（翻译句子） _________________________________________‎ ‎（三）选词完成句子：‎ Let’s , tennis, watch, basketball, plays, two, has, sports, ball , computer ‎ ‎1.Let’s play ___________________________.‎ ‎2.He has a racket. He plays _________________________.‎ ‎3.She has a computer. She _______________ computer games.‎ ‎4.She has a tennis racket, and a tennis _______________________.‎ ‎5.They have a TV. They ____________________ TV.‎ ‎6.___________________ play basketball. ‎ Unit 5 Section B 预习案 目标要求：⒈巩固本单元所学句型⒉预习section B生词和短语⒊学会let’s句型及答语 预习过程：‎ ‎⒈试读课本P103 Unit 5 Section B单词，把不会的单词标记下来_____‎ ‎⒉把课本P103 Unit 5 Section B单词分灯 ‎⑴形容词________ ⑵句词__________ ⑶动词及词组____________‎ ‎⒊看课本P28（Section B, 1a），将单词与图片匹配 ‎⒋翻译句子（参照section B 2c 3a）‎ ‎⑴让我们玩电脑游戏吧！_______________‎ ‎_⑵那听起来很有趣。_______________‎ ‎⑶他有8幅网球拍__________________ ‎ ‎⑷他没有进行体育活动_____________‎ ‎⑸他只在电视上看它们_______________________________________________‎ 三、导学演练 ‎⒈词汇interesting有趣的，其构成加ing后缀 interest+ing bor+ing relax+ing ‎⒉let’s…提建议，答语：That sounds interesting 让我们打篮球吧，那听起来很有趣 Let’s____________________,That__________________‎ ‎⒊have/has表示“有”，has是have的第三人称单数，当主语是第三人称时表示“有”用has，其余用“have”.用have,has填空 ‎⑴I _____________________ a watch ⑵We_____________many basketbals ‎⑶You_______a computer ⑷They_____two backpacks ‎⑸He__________a tennis racket 四、把预习中存在的问题写下来______________________‎ ‎（一）根据中文提示写单词 ‎1.I think Chinese is very__________________(有趣的)‎ ‎2.Watching TV is very_______________(轻松的)‎ ‎3.I can’t speak English .It’s too____________(困难的)‎ ‎4.We have_____________(仅仅)one basket ball bat.So we can’t play it.‎ ‎5.Do you think math is very__________________(枯燥的)‎ ‎（二）用括号中所给单词的适当形式填空 ‎6.How many_____________(collect)do you have?‎ ‎7.I have no apple,please me some_______________(much)‎ ‎8.He doesn’t like playing sports,but he likes watching__________(they)on TV ‎9._____________(play)basketball is very relaxing.‎ ‎10.Mr Creen__________(watch)TV every day.‎ ‎(三)选词填空 (What’s on, volleyball, play, have, bat, tennis, How do you, difficult)‎ ‎1.Math can be_________.‎ ‎2.___________television?‎ ‎3.Does Rick have a ___________racket?‎ ‎4.Does your brother__________a soccer?‎ Unit 5 Section B课堂学习 the first period 学习目标：1、会用本课所学单词短语2、听说本课相关的对话 3、掌握本课出现的新句型 课堂学习过程：‎ 一．交流检查：1、课前默写单词短语 2、生生、师生互动，互问探讨，解决预习存在的问题。‎ ‎3、大卡片检查单词、短语记忆情况 4、核对预习案的习题，订证答案。‎ 二、说体育项目话题，自由对话 Talk about sports in pairs Ask questions①What sports do you like? ②Do you have a basketball/soccer ball……‎ ‎③What do you often do after school? ④Are there any sports clubs in your school.‎ ‎⑤Which sports clubs do you want to join? ⑥Are you good at football/running?‎ 三、1、完成1a 图词匹配，看图写词 ‎2、词语释义：讲解形容词后缀组合 Interesting boring relaxing 其他形容词也有类似后缀，tiring累的，疲劳的 exciting激动的，兴奋的 其他形容词后缀你见过吗？helpful careful famous dangerous ‎ Friendly lovely sunny rainy noisy windy等等 四、1b有条件画简笔画，描述活动1a的一个单词，让学生猜出单词 五、自主学习：‎ ‎1.Listen twice and complete 2a 2b ‎2.Listen again and complete the following dialogue:‎ ‎ A: Let’s play computer ____________ .‎ ‎ B: That ______________interesting, but I don’t have a computer.‎ ‎ A: ________ , do you have a volleyball?‎ ‎ B: Yes.‎ ‎ A: Then let’s _______________ volleyball.‎ B: Oh, volleyball is so ________________________.‎ A: OK. Let’s __________________ TV.‎ B: That sounds __________ .Hmmm… Let’s play soccer! Do you have a soccer ball?‎ A: No, I don’t. ‎ B: Oh。 Well, do you have a _____________ ?‎ A: Yes, I do. Let’s play basketball.‎ B: That ______________ ________________ .‎ ‎3..Listen to 2a and repeat, then Ss read aloud in pairs or alone.‎ ‎4.Practise 2c in paire or in groups with some other words.‎ 六、巩固练习 将下列句子译成汉语 ‎1.这首歌听起来很有意思______________________________________‎ ‎2.让我们打电脑游戏吧。_______________________________________‎ ‎3.你喜欢什么体育运动？_______________________________________ ‎ ‎4.你想打篮球吗？_______________________________________________‎ ‎5．你有一个网球拍吗？____________________________________________‎ Section B The second period 目标要求：1会.用本课所学单词、句型进行写作。2.归纳、复习本单元所学内容。‎ ‎3、解决学生存在的疑难问题。‎ 学习过程：‎ 一、爬黑板听写本单元单词、短语 二．学生交换检查所写生词及上节练习题 三．复习上节听力2a,2b，根据听力回答教师提出的几个问题。‎ What do they want to do? 2.Does Tony have a compnter?‎ ‎3.Is Tony good at volleyball? 4.How does Tony feel about basketball?‎ ‎5.Does Betty have a soccer ball?‎ 四．完成3a ‎ ‎1.自己阅读圈出与体育有关的物品。‎ ‎2.合上书，听一遍录音。 3.根据课文回答黑板上的问题 ‎⑴Who has a great sports collection?⑵How many tennis rackets and basketballs ,do he have?‎ ‎⑶Does he play sports? ⑷How does he watch sports?‎ ‎⑸Does he have 3 soccer balls?‎ 五、3b ⑴让学生说出图中物品的名称 ⑵读书杂志的文章，让学生填入词。‎ 六、写出一段话，说出你的体育用品和其他物品，根据下面问题，写出答案。‎ ‎1.What sports do you play? I play________________________‎ ‎2.What sports things do you have?I have_______________________‎ ‎3.What other things do you have?‎ ‎4.Are you good at_______________________‎ ‎5.Do you like______________________‎ ‎6.How often do you play_________________‎ 七、自主活动调查，就有关体育物品展开对话，写下物品及名字。‎ 八．巩固练习 ‎(一)、综合填空： 根据短文内容及首字母提示填词 I don’t have a tennis r_____,but I have a tennis ball. My f______Jim has two tennis r_________.But he.d_____have a tennis ball.so I say to Jim,“L_______play tennis Jim”I have two baseball b________.a baseball and two boxing gloves we usually go a________play baseball. H____________interesting and relaxing！‎ ‎(二)、单项填空：从各题所给的选项中选出最佳答案。‎ ‎（ ）1.Our English lesson is very______,I don’t like it.‎ A.relaxing B.interesting C.difficult D.fun ‎( )2.My father has a______ball collections. He has only four balls.‎ A.great B.large C.big D.small ‎( )3.He like watching sports_______TV. A.in B.at C.on D.for ‎( )4.Let’s play volleyball______________?‎ A.shall we B.will you C.don’t you D.do you ‎( )5.______at home_______interesting.I like to do it A.Reading is B.Read,is C.Toread,are D.Reading,are ‎( )6.We play sports_______. A.everyday B.every day C.two day D.every year 初一英语单元综合能力测评（Unit 5）‎ 一．单词拼写根据句意和汉语提示写单词。‎ ‎1.I have a baseball and I also have a baseball b_______(拍)‎ ‎2.I can’t play baseball.I think it’s very d_________(困难的)‎ ‎3.Watching TV is b________(无聊的).Let’s play ping-pong ‎4.We have many c_____(俱乐部):soccer,tsketball,ping-pong and more.Join us!‎ ‎5.After class the children go to play v_____.(排球)on the playground(操场)‎ 二．单项填空 从各题所给的四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳答案。‎ ‎（ ）1.That_____boring.I don’t like it.‎ A.sounds B.sound C.is sound D.listens ‎( )2.Tom has______great collection.They are 10 tennis______and 20 tennis balls.‎ A.a,rackets B.the,racket C.a,racket D.the,rackets ‎( )3.Do they_____volleyball_______?‎ A.plays,every day B.play,every day C.plays,everyday D.play,everyday ‎( )4.Do you like playing______soccer?‎ A.the B.a C./ D.an ‎( )5.Let’s_____a football game.‎ A.watch B.watches C.to watch D.watching ‎( )6.____computer games_____fun A.Play,are B.Play,is C.To play,are D.Playing,is ‎( )7.Let him_____soccer with us.‎ A.to play B.play C.playing D.plays ‎( )8.We have______clubs in our school.‎ A.much B.many C,more D.any ‎( )9.Jim has a great ball______.‎ A.box B.games C.sport D.collection ‎( )10.He_________a tennis racket.‎ A.not have B.doesn’t have C.don’t have D.have not 三． 句子改写 根据所给要求，改写下列句子。第空限填一词 ‎1.I have a volleyball and a basketball.(改为否定句)‎ I_________ ______a volleyball_______a basketball.‎ His brother has a baseball.(改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎______his brother_____a baseball?‎ Do your parents have a book?(作出肯定回答)‎ Yes,_______ ________‎ ‎4.I have a volleyball.I don’t have a soccer ball.(连成并列句)‎ ‎__________ _______‎ ‎5.Mr Green has many volleyballs.(对画线部分提问)‎ ‎____________ __________Mr Green__________?‎ 四．完成句子 根据汉语提示完成句子翻译。每空词数不限。‎ ‎1.咱们运动运动吧。_______________________________________sports.‎ ‎2.看足球比赛很有意思________________________is__________________.‎ ‎3.彼得是他家唯一的儿子。Peter is________________in his family ‎4.我想要知道更多的信息。I want to______________information.‎ ‎5.请快点加入我们的排球俱乐部吧。Please________our_______soon.‎ 五、补全对话 在每个空白处填入一个适当的单词，合对话意思完整。‎ A :Hi,Jack. ‎ B :Hi,Tony. ‎ A. :Do you like baseball? ‎ B: Yes,I____________（1）-.‎ A: Let’s________________(2) baseball,OK? ‎ B: That__________________(3 )good.‎ A: Do you_______________(_4 )a baseball bat? ‎ B: Sorry,I_______________________(_5 ) have.‎ A :Mr Green has a great sports collection.Let’s go there.‎ A :Hello,Mr Green.Can I borrow a________________(6)______________(7)?‎ C: Sure.I have some baseball. But__________(_8 ) are they?I can’t find_____________(9.)‎ A :Let’s help you.Oh,they’re under the table ‎ C: Now you can take it A:and B:___________(_10) Hello,friends! Look at the p 六、综合填空 根据短文内容及首字母提示，填写所缺单词，使短文意思完整。‎ Hello,friends!Look at the p______1.Do you k______2 the girl in the photo?Her n_____3 is f________4 the USA.She’s twelve.Helen’s father is in C________5 now,but her m_______6 isn’t.So she’s in Beijing w______7 her father.We’re in the same school,but we’re in d______8 c______9.She’s in Class One,Grade Seven.I’m in Class Four,Grade Seven.Helen h_____10 me learn English.She likes China very much.‎ 七、书面表达 假如你非常喜欢运动，每天都去学校运动中心做运动，因为那里有很多体育器材：篮球、足球、乒乓球、排球、网球和棒球。你今天要帮体育老师Mr White写一写有关介绍学校运动中心的广告，希望同学们赶快加入到这儿来。（40个单词左右）.‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit5 同步阅读理解与写作 ‎（A）‎ 阅读下面短文，然后从各小题所给的四个选项中选出一个最佳答案。‎ Polo is a game.Eight people play it.Four people play on one dde.They all have long sticks.And they all try to hit a ball.‎ There is one more thing about polo.All the people ride in horses.‎ Up and down they go.The horses help play the game.They take the people where the ball is.‎ ‎( )1.In polo______people play on each side.‎ A.two B.four C.eight D.eleven ‎( )2.This passage is about a game that is played______.‎ A.in the water B.on horses C.in school yard D.by foot ‎( )3.In polo,the people have______sticks.‎ A.long B.short C.no D.fat ‎( )4.In polo,people try to hit a________.‎ A.stick B.mark C.ball D.horse ‎( )5What’s the Chinese for“polo”?‎ A.马术 B.马戏 C.魔术 D.马球 ‎（B）‎ 阅读下面短文，然后根据短文内容回答问题。‎ Look at these six students.They are my class-mates.They like sports very much Helen likes table tennis and ice skating very much.Nick is good at flying a kite,playing football and playing yo-yo.Joe’s favou-rite sports are ice skating and tennis.Jack always plays football and goes swimming.He likes them best.Lily and Lucy are twins.They like swimming and skiing.‎ ‎6.What does Helen like?__________________________________________‎ ‎7.The twins and Joe like skating right?___________________________.‎ ‎8.Who likes ice skating?_______________________________‎ ‎9.Who likes swimming?____________________________.‎ ‎10.Are Helen and Lucy twins?____________________________.‎ ‎（C）‎ 阅读理解，阅读下面短文并根据短文内容回答下列问题 I have a small sports colletin.In it I have seven bags.Three bags are big,and four bags are small.I have some basketballs and volleyballs I put two volleyballs in each small bag.And I put two basketballs and two volleyballs in each big bag.The number of the volleyballs is my age.‎ ‎1.How many volleyballs do you have?___________________________‎ ‎2.How many basketballs do you have?__________________________‎ ‎3.What’s in those big bags?________________________________‎ ‎4.Where are the basketballs?______________________________‎ ‎5.Do you know how old I am?_______________________________‎ ‎(D)‎ 根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。‎ There is a red hen.She lives in a small house.On the hill near her house there is an old fox(狐狸).The old fox wants to catch the hen very much.But he can’t get her because she is very clever.One day,the hen isn’t at home.The fox goes into her house.The hen goes back home and the fox catches her and puts her in his bag.Then he runs back to his house.The fox is very happy and goes to relax.But the hen has a good idea.She makes a hole in the bag and runs out.When the fox comes back for his supper,he finds only an empty bag there.‎ ‎（ ）1.Where does the old fox live?‎ A.Near the hill. B.In the house C.On the hill near the hen’s house. D.On the hill far from the hen’s house.‎ ‎( )2.What does the old fox want to do?‎ A.He wants to play with the hen B.He wants to have the hen for supper.‎ C.He wants to have the hen for supper. D.He wants to steal the hen’s egg.‎ ‎( )3.How does the hen run away(跑掉)？‎ She runs away from the window. B.She makes a hole in the bag and runs out.‎ C.There’s a hole in the bag and she runs away. D.The fox lets her go.‎ ‎( )4.What’s in the bag at last(最后)？‎ A.There is a hen in it. B.There is an empty bag in it C.There isn’t anything in it D.There are some eggs in it ‎( )5.What does the fox have for supper that day?‎ A.He hasn’t any food. B.He has some chicken C.He catches the hen again and eats it D.He eats some eggs.‎ ‎(E)‎ 根据短文内容，选择最佳答案 Do you know something about tree rings?Do you know they can tell us what the weather was like,sometimes even hundreds of years ago?‎ ‎ A tree will grow well in a climate(气候)with lots of sunshine and rainfll.And little sunshine or rainfall will limit(限制)the growth of a tree.We can see the change of climate by studying the tree rings.For example,to find out the weather of ten years ago,count the rings of a tree from the outside to the inside.If the tenth ring is far from the eleventh ring,then we’re sure that it was sunny and rainy most of that year.If it is near to the eleventh ring,then the climate that year was bad.‎ ‎ Tree rings are important not only(不仅)for studying the history of weather but also(而且)for studying the history of man.Many centuries ago there lived a lot of people at a place in New Mexico.But now you can find only sand there-no trees and no people.What happened?‎ ‎ A scientist studied the rings of dead trees there.He found that the people had to leave because they had cut down all the trees to make fires and buildings.As all the trees had gone,the people there had to move.‎ ‎( )1.____in good climate.‎ A.Tree rings grow far from each other B.Tree rings become thinner C.Trees don’t need sunshine or rainfall D.People can cut down most of the trees ‎( )2.The scientists are interested in studying tree rings because tree rings can tell____‎ A.whether a tree was strong.or not B.whether people took good care of the trees or not C..whether the climate was good or not D.how old the trees were ‎( )3.If you want to find out the weather of twenty years ago,you should study______of a tree from the outside to the inside.‎ A..the twentieth ring B.the tenth ring C.the nineteenth ring D.the twenty-first ring ‎( )4.Why did people usually live in places with lots of trees?‎ A.Trees could tell the change of the weather.‎ B.Trees brought lots of sunshine and rain.‎ C.Trees could make weather not too hot or too cold.‎ D.Trees could be used for burning and for building houses.‎ ‎( )5.The people had to leave the place in New Mexico because_______.‎ A.bad weather stopped the growth of trees ‎ B.they no longer had trees and the land became sand C.they didn’t have enough trees for burning ‎ D.there was too much rain.‎ ‎(F)‎ 读短文，判断下列名子时否符合短文的内容，符合的写T（true），不符合的写F（false）。‎ One day,father makes a very nice plane.All his children are very happy and want to play with it first.They quarrel（争吵）but they can’t agree with each other.Father thinks hard and he has an idea.He says,“This plane is only for the best child.He or she neverquarrels with your mother and always helps your mother do the housework.”‎ When the children hear their father’s word,they all go away and day in disappointment(失望),“Then it’s only for you,Dad!”‎ ‎( )1.Father makes a nice ship.‎ ‎( )2.All the children like the plane very much.‎ ‎( )3.Every child wants to play with it first.‎ ‎( )4.The children can agree with each other.‎ ‎( )5.Father wants the children to be good children.‎ ‎（G）‎ 读短文，填空 My name is Alice.I’m 12 years old.I have many friends.I spend a lot of time with my friends.I often go to parties with them.I like singing and dancing very much.All my friends like me.‎ I like sports,too.I can swim.But I can’t play chess.I don’t read many books.I don’t watch TV.I’m happy.Alice is my friend.She is 12 years old.She has____________ (1) friends.She spends a lot of time with us.She often goes to_________________(2)with us.She likes singing and____________________ ( 3 )very much.All her friends like________________________( 4 ). She also likes_____________ ( 5 ) very much.She can_______________ (6 ).She doesn’t read many____________(7) or watch TV. In a word,Alice is a very ___________________ ( 8 ) girl.‎ ‎(H)‎ Mr Smith is an English man. He teaches English well. His English classes are very interesting. He likes us and we like him too.‎ ‎ Mr Smith has two children---Tom and Mary. Tom is seven and his sister Mary is four. Tom goes to school but Mary doesn’t. Mr Smith likes to wear a T-shirt and jeans. Football is his favourite sport. After school we often have a basketball match. Sometimes Mr Smith watches and joins us. He plays basketball just for fun.‎ ‎( )1.Mr Smith is ________________________.‎ ‎ A.a Chinese teacher B.an English driver C.an English teacher ‎( )2.How many sons does Mr Smith have? ____________________________.‎ ‎ A.One B.Two C.Three ‎( )3.Mary doesn’t go to school because _______________________________.‎ ‎ A.she looks beautiful B.she is seven C.she is only four.‎ ‎( )4.___________is Mr Smith’s favourite sport.‎ ‎ A.Basketball B.Football C.Volleyball ‎( )5.The text is about____________________.‎ ‎ A.Mr Smith’s son B.Mr Smith C.Tom and Mary ‎(I)写作训练。‎ 根据所给的中英文提示，写一篇短文。‎ Sally非常喜欢运动，她每天都要锻炼身体。她喜欢的体育项目有：网球、足球、溜冰等。她经常和同学位 一起玩，也爱看电视上的体育比赛。另外，她还收集体育用品，她收集了24个网球拍，65个排球，39个足球。她是一个运动爱好者。‎ play sports,a great sports collection,fan ‎________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit 6 Do you like bananas ?‎ 课型：新授 ‎ Section A 课前预习 学习目标：1.熟悉表食物的单词。 2.试着谈论自己喜欢不喜欢的食物。‎ ‎ 3.了解可数名词与不可数名词。‎ 预习过程：通过预习，请把下列单词、短语和句子译成英语。‎ 一、1.单词：汉堡包 花椰菜 西红柿 ‎ 草莓 梨 沙拉 ‎ 胡萝卜 鸡肉 ‎ 并按可数名词与不可数名词进行分类：‎ 可数名词 ‎ 不可数名词 ‎ ‎2.短语：炸马铃薯条 冰淇淋 ‎ ‎3.句子：1）你喜欢苹果？不，不喜欢。 ‎ ‎2）我不喜欢冰淇淋。 ‎ ‎3）他们不喜欢桔汁。 ‎ 二、1.（1a）理解单词意思，并将单词与图画相匹配。‎ ‎2.可数名词与不可数名词 看课本P94.Grammar Ⅱ 名词；了解可数名词与不可数名词，以及可数名词的复数形式的部分规则。‎ 三、知识点讲解：‎ ‎1）在本单元，like 作动词 “喜欢；愿意”，如果想要表示“喜欢做…”常用到的短语是:‎ like to do…/ like doing 如：He likes swimming/ to swim .‎ ‎2）不可数名词没有复数形式，其作主语时，谓语动词谓语动词应用单数形式。如：Milk is my favorite drink.‎ 四、预习自测：‎ ‎1.用括号中所给词的正确形式填空。‎ ‎1）There are some (tomato) in the basket .‎ ‎2）Do you like French (fry)?‎ ‎3)Chicken (be )very delicious .‎ ‎4）Can you speak (China)?‎ ‎5)The little girl likes (strawberry) a lot.‎ ‎2.单项选择。‎ ‎1） you like apples ?‎ A. Can B. Do C. Are D. Does ‎2)He a tennis racket .‎ A. not have B. doesn’t have C. don’t have D. have not ‎3)This is orange . orange is on the desk .‎ A. an ;An B. an ;The C. The ;an D. the ;An ‎4)That interesting . I like it.‎ A. sounds B. sound C. is sound D. listen Section A: 课堂学习（一）‎ The First period .(Section A 1a—2c)‎ 学习目标：‎ ‎1.掌握表示食物的单词。2.学会谈论自己喜欢不喜欢的食物。‎ 学习过程：‎ 一、 交流检查。‎ ‎1. 组长检查预习案，以小组形式提出预习中的问题，老师给予指导及解答。‎ ‎2. 默写下列单词短语（限时一分钟）‎ 冰淇淋 汉堡包 炸马铃薯条，薯条 ‎ 西红柿 沙拉 梨 ‎ ‎3. 有一位学生打大卡片，学生读3遍（正打，反打），巩固词汇。‎ ‎4. Page 31, 1a,让一位学生读单词，并说出其汉语意思，然后说出答案并核对。‎ 二、 听力。（1b,2a,2b）‎ ‎1. Listen to 1b twice and number ‎2. Listen to 2a and circle the food you hera.‎ ‎2）Listen again and fill in the blanks of 2b. Then Ss listen and repeat 2b.‎ ‎3）学生自由朗读并背诵听力材料P86，并当堂检查背诵情况。‎ 三、操练：处理1c、2c然后找几组同学当堂表演。‎ 四、拓展延伸：试着说说你的家庭成员喜欢和不喜欢的食物。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ 五、课堂自测。1.选择填空。‎ ‎1)Let’s French fries .‎ A. to have B. having C. have D. to eat ‎2)Do you like or apples ?‎ A. orange B. oranges C. banana D. strawberry ‎3)I don’t like tomatoes French fries .‎ A. with B. or C. of D. and ‎4)She eggs for breakfast .‎ A. like B. likes C. don’t like D. isn’t like ‎5)Do you like ?‎ A. run B. runing C. running D. to running ‎2.按要求改写句子，每空限填一词。‎ ‎1）I like ice cream .(改为一般疑问句) like ice cream ?‎ ‎2)Jin Hua has a good friend .(改为复数句) Jin Hua has good .‎ ‎3)They like some hamburgers . (改为否定句) They hamburgers .‎ ‎4)His brother has a new pen .(改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ his brother a new pen ?‎ ‎5)I usually have bread and milk for lunch . (就画线部分提问)‎ ‎ do you usually for lunch?‎ Section A 课堂学习（二）‎ The Second period （Section A 3—4）‎ 学习过程：‎ 一、 复习检查。‎ ‎1.默写你学过的食物类名词。‎ 可数名词。（不少于3个） ‎ 不可数名词。（不少于3个） ‎ ‎1. 翻译句子。‎ 你喜欢香蕉吗？ ‎ 我不喜欢沙拉。 ‎ 让我们吃冰淇淋吧。 ‎ 二、 自主学习。‎ ‎1.P33—3.pairwork。找出Bob和Bill各自喜欢和不喜欢的食物，完成P33的表格。‎ ‎2.然后根据表格写出Bob和Bill各自喜欢和不喜欢的食物。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎3.P33—4.Survey and writing.‎ ‎1）以小组形式就表格中的食物向你的同学提问，找出他们喜欢和不喜欢的食物。‎ ‎2）依据所填表格写一篇短文。like this：Liu Li likes … ，Zhao Jun doesn’t like…‎ 然后向全班同学汇报。‎ 三、拓展延伸：就表格中的食物调查一下你家人。找出他们喜欢和不喜欢的食物：‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ 四、课堂自测：‎ ‎（一） 根据句意及首字母完成单词。‎ ‎1.Do you like French f ?‎ ‎2.They like hamburgers for l ?‎ ‎3.The girl likes ice c very much .‎ ‎4.Apples ,bananas and oranges are all f .‎ ‎5.I don’t like milk for b .‎ ‎(二)连词成句：‎ ‎1.you , any , have , do , salad ‎ ‎ ‎2.like , very , I , strawberries , much ‎ ‎ ‎3.the , to , your , take , sister , books , please ‎ ‎ ‎4.doesn’t , Jerry , like , French ,fries ‎ ‎ ‎5.orange , every , has , an , ,day , Tony ‎ ‎ Section B 课前预习 学习目标：‎ ‎1.熟悉Section B中的单词 。‎ ‎2.学会了解他人喜欢不喜欢的食物。‎ ‎3.大致了解自己与他人早、中、晚三餐喜欢吃的食物。‎ 预习过程：通过预习，请把下列单词、短语和句子译成英语。‎ 一、1.单词：胡萝卜 水果 奔跑者 ‎ 蔬菜；植物 甜食 ‎ ‎2.短语：跑步明星 许多的，大量的 ‎ 健康的食物 吃早餐 ‎ 句型：1）早饭时，我喜欢鸡蛋，苹果和香蕉。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎2）午餐时，我弟弟喜欢汉堡包和鸡肉。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎3）晚饭时，她喜欢西红柿和薯条。‎ ‎ ‎ 请观察以上句子中的动词有什麽变化，为甚麽？‎ ‎ ‎ 二、 知识点解读。‎ ‎1.lots of 意味“大量，许多”通常即可修饰不可数名词，也可修饰可数名词复数，它用a lot of替代。如：There are lots of /a lot of books on my bookcase.‎ ‎2.run 动词。 跑，跑步、奔跑。其名词要双写最后一个辅音字母+er。 runner 奔跑者 如 win （获胜） 动词，其名词：获胜者 winner ‎3.healthy 健康的，形容词。其名词：health 健康 ‎①I am very healthy我很健康②It’s good for my health,它对我的健康有好处。‎ ‎4、在本单元have 表示“吃，喝”之意，如have ice cream 吃冰淇淋,have breakfast / lunch/ dinner吃早/午/晚钣 have / eat ……for breakfast / lunch /dinner早/午/晚饭时，……吃……‎ 如she has /eats eggs ,bananas and apples for breakfast 早饭她吃鸡蛋、香蕉和苹果。‎ 三、 预习自测 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词。‎ ‎1、He likes i cream very much.‎ ‎2、They don’t eat l at home.‎ ‎3、Apples ,bananas and oranges are all f .‎ ‎4、Liu Xiang is a running s ,Many people know him.‎ ‎5、Lots of r are in Class One . Grade Seven.‎ ‎6、I don’t like eggs for d ,but I like apples .‎ ‎7、There are many b in the fruit shop .‎ ‎8.Juice is a h drink ‎9. She often eats bread and a h for dinner .‎ ‎10. Some b is in the basket .‎ Section B 课堂学习（一）‎ The First period (Section B 1a—2c)‎ 学习目标：1.掌握Section B 中的单词。2.学会了解他人喜欢不喜欢的食物。‎ 学习过程。‎ 一、 交流检查。1.组长检查预习案，以小组形式提出预习中的问题，老师给予指导并解答。‎ ‎2.翻译下列单词及短语，（限时两分钟）。‎ 健康的食物 奔跑者 跑步明星 吃早饭 ‎ 晚餐，正餐 水果 ‎ ‎3.由一位学生打大卡片，学生读3遍，巩固词汇。‎ 二、课堂学习 1.Page34，处理1a。‎ ‎2.处理1b，把1a的单词正确分类，并引导学生找出更多关于蔬菜、水果类的单词。‎ ‎3.Listen to2a and circle the words you hear.. Listen again and fill in the chart of 2b.‎ ‎4.Listen to 2a and 2b the third time and complete the following dialogue:‎ ‎ A; Do you like _________________?‎ ‎ B:Yes, I do. I like all ______________________.‎ ‎ A:__________ about broccoli? Do you like _______________?‎ ‎ B: Yes, I do. It’s ___________. Do you like vegetables?‎ ‎ A: No, I ______ like vegetables. Well only _______. I like salad. But I like _______ .‎ I like _______, ________ .‎ ‎ B: How about _________ ? I don’t like apples!‎ ‎ A:Yes, I like apples. And you __________ what I really like?‎ ‎ B: What? A: __________________.‎ ‎5. Ss listen and repeat. Then read aloud in pairs.‎ ‎6. Ss practise 2c in pairs.‎ 三 、拓展延伸：将2a、2b的听力材料改写成一篇短文。e.g. Tom likes all vegetables …‎ 四、课堂自测： 1.用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1）Tom (not like) chicken . 2）There are five (apple) in my back—pack .‎ ‎3）Tom and Mike (not like) eggs . 4）The girl (like) the hat .‎ ‎5）Let’s (eat) some bread .‎ ‎2.按要求改写下列句子。‎ ‎1)Bill likes oranges.Tom also likes oranges.(合并为一个句子 ‎)Bill Tom oranges .‎ ‎2)Do your father and mother play volleyball ?(作否定回答)‎ ‎ , .‎ ‎3)Does Kate have dinner at six in the evening ?（改为肯定句）‎ Kate at six in the evening .‎ ‎4）Kang Hui has many books . (改为同义句) ‎ Kang Hui has books.‎ ‎5)My sister likes fruit for dinner . (对话线部分提问 ‎) your sister for dinner ?‎ Section B 课堂学习 （二）‎ The Second period (Section B 3a –4b)‎ 学习目标：‎ ‎1.阅读并理解短文。‎ ‎2.能够熟练表达自己与他人喜欢不喜欢的食物。‎ ‎3.了解哪些是健康的食物，哪些是不健康的食物，养成良好的饮食习惯。‎ 学习过程：‎ 一.1.英汉互译。‎ 许多 running star make a list of food ‎ 每天 have … for breakfast ‎ ‎2.复习导入。‎ 二、自主学习。 1.处理3a。‎ ‎1）Fast—reading 并用不同的标记标出水果和食物的名称，订正答案。 ‎ ‎2）Careful—reading 判断正（T）误（F）.‎ ‎① ( )Sandra has hamburgers , Salad and pears for dinner .‎ ‎② ( )She doesn’t like tomatoes or French fried for dinner .‎ ‎③ ( )She likes apples and bananas for breakfast .‎ ‎④ ( )She eats lots of healthy food and she runs very fast .‎ ‎3)Listen and repeat .‎ ‎4)Read aloud and retell .‎ ‎2.处理3b。根据图画完成短文，然后让学生齐读。‎ ‎3.处理3c。4.处理4a—4b。‎ 三、拓展延伸：以组为单位让学生讨论哪些是健康的食物，哪些是不健康的食物，引导学生养成良好的饮食习惯。‎ 四、课堂自测：‎ ‎1.选择填空 A：Hey , Jane ! 1 B：They are hamburgers . A： 2 ‎ B：Yes , I like them for lunch 3 . A：I like eggs and tomatoes . 4 ‎ A：At school . B：Let’s play ping—pong after school . A： 5 ‎ A. Oh , where do you eat lunch ?‎ B. What do you like for lunch ?‎ C. That sounds good .‎ D. Are these your hamburgers ?‎ E. Do you like hamburgers?‎ F. What are these ?‎ ‎2.用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1)His mother ____ (not like) French fries . 2)Peter likes ____ (play) basketball .‎ ‎3)Ann ____ (have) a great sport collection . 4)We should ____ (eat) more vegetables .‎ ‎5)Let’s ______ (have) chicken and broccoli .‎ 初一英语单元综合练习（Unit6）‎ 一、选择填空。‎ ‎（ ）1、 do you have lunch? Chicken and tomatoes A、What; for B、What; / C、How ; for D、How ; /‎ ‎（ ）2、-Let’s baseball .‎ ‎ -OK., Let’s .‎ A、play; go B、plays; go C、play; to go D、play; goes ‎（ ）3、—Do you like ice cream for dessert?‎ A、a B、the C、/ D、an ‎（ ）4、I have a cat. It likes fish. It eats every day.‎ A、a lot B、many C、Lots of D、much ‎（ ）5、—Does your English teacher sing very ?-Yes, she does.‎ A、good B、nice C、great D、well ‎( )6、What Tom like for breakfast?‎ A、does; eat B、is ; eat C、does ; to eat D、is; to eat ‎（ ）7、Are there tomatoes on the table ?‎ ‎ A、a B、an C、any D、some ‎ ‎( )8、Thanks you family photo.‎ ‎ A、for B、of C、in D、at ‎( )9、Smith’s mother is English teacher in university.‎ ‎ A、a, an B、an, an C、an, a D、a, a ‎( )10、He a tennis racket .‎ ‎ A、don’t have B 、not have C、doesn’t have D、have not ‎ 二、根据句意和首字母完成单词。‎ ‎1、、Jim can run fast because he is a r in our school.‎ ‎2、 I like c very much. , they are good for our health .‎ ‎3、 Children should (应当)eat lots of f .‎ ‎4、What do you have for d .‎ ‎5、Zhou Jielun is a singing s .‎ ‎6、She eats h food every day.‎ 三、按要求改写句子 ‎1、Linda and Tom like French fries.(改为否定句)‎ They French fries.‎ ‎2Does Tom like eggs for breakfast?(否定回答)‎ ‎ , .‎ ‎3My teacher plays basketball .(改一般疑问句)‎ ‎ your teacher basketball?‎ ‎4My ball is under the bed (对画线部分提问)‎ ‎ your ball?‎ ‎5Are those your apples?(改成单数句)‎ ‎ your ?‎ 四、完形填空 ‎ Are you healthy? Some boys and girls don’t like 1 .They don’t have carrots for lunch 2 they don’t have broccoli for dinner. But vegetables and 3 are good for us. They are 4 food. You can eat 5 them every day. 6 are good for you, too . But some boys and girls don’t play sports--they only 7 them on TV .“ play soccer ? Oh it sounds 8 . Play 9 ? Oh, it sounds difficult. ” If （如果） you want to be healthy, ‎ ‎ 10 vegetables and play sports every day?”‎ ‎1、A、food B、vegetables C、fruit D、basketball ‎2、A、and B、but C、so D、or ‎3、A、fruit B、ice C、hamburgers D、drinks ‎4、A、fast B 、good C、healthy D、bad ‎5、A、lots of B、many C、some D、more ‎6、A、Schools B、Sports C、Family D、Clubs ‎7、A、look at B、see C、watch D、look ‎8、A、interesting B、relaxing C、boring D、difficult ‎9、A、chess B、basketball C、computer games D、cards ‎10、A、eat B、like C、has D、bring 五、在每个空白处填入一个适当的单词，使对话意思完整。‎ A：Excuse me . 1 that boy over there . B：He’s my brother , Jack .‎ A：Does he like ice cream ? B：Yes , he 2 it very much . Does he like carrots .‎ A： 3 , he likes them . B：Does he like chicken ?‎ A： 4 , he 5 like it at all .‎ 六、连词成句，注意语法和标点符号。‎ ‎1. like , not , cream , does , Mary , ice ‎ ‎ ‎2. I , some , have , pen , new ‎ ‎ ‎3. mother , have , egg , for , two , her , breakfast ‎ ‎ ‎4.she , does , hamburgers , like ‎ ‎ ‎5. eat , every , tomato , I ,three , day ‎ ‎ 七、把下列句子译成英语。‎ ‎1.你晚饭想吃沙拉吗？ ‎ ‎2.吃健康食品对你有益。 ‎ ‎3.李凯喜欢吃早餐时吃一个鸡蛋。 ‎ ‎4.琳达每天都要吃一个苹果。 ‎ ‎5.李明非常喜欢鸡肉，你喜欢吗？ ‎ ‎6.皮特的卧室里有许多书。 ‎ ‎7.刘翔是赛跑明星。 ‎ Unit 6阅读与写作 一、完形填空。‎ ‎ Tomorrow is Sandy’s birthday . He 1 to have a football . His mother asks（问）him , “ What do you want as your birthday present (礼物) , my dear son ? ” He says to his mother , “ I want to know whether (是否) you can buy me what I want . ” Later (过后) ，his mother and his father talk with each other (彼此谈论) about their son’s wish (愿望) .‎ ‎ 2 Sandy’s birthday , there are 3 delicious food 4 the table , such as (例如) bananas , oranges , strawberries , apples and pizzas . His mother invites all the friends to celebrate (庆祝) his son’s birthday . Everyone 5 a present . When Sandy opens the presents , he finds that all of them give him a book . His mother says , “ 6 like it ? Last year you told me you wanted to study hard and become (成为) a writer (作家) . That’s why I ask (请求) everyone to buy you a book to realize your dream . ” his mother says 7 a smile .‎ ‎1. A. like B. want C. to like D. wants ‎ ‎2. A. On B. Of C. With D. In ‎3. A. many B. lot C. any D. lots of ‎4. A. in B. on C. under D. near ‎5. A. brings B. takes C. goes D. likes ‎6. A. Does B. Do C. Can D. Shall ‎7. A. take B. with C. and D. as ‎ 二、阅读理解 ‎ A In America , many children eat too much food every day . They eat too much meat , chocolate and ice cream . But they do not do enough exercise (足够的锻炼) .‎ Some children never (从不) walk or run . They come to school in cars or buses . They don’t play games at the school . And after school they just watch TV or play computer games .‎ The doctor says it is good for all children to eat more vegetables and fruit , do more exercise and go to bed early .‎ ‎1.Who eat too much food in America ?‎ ‎ A. Women B. Men C. Old people D. Children ‎2. What do children eat ?‎ ‎ A. Meat B. Chocolate C. Ice cream D. A , B and C ‎3. Do they do enough exercise ?‎ ‎ A. Yes , they do . B. No , they don’t . C. Yes , they are . D. No ,they aren’t .‎ ‎4. How do they come to school ?‎ ‎ A. Walk B. Run C. By bike D. By car ‎5. What’s good for children ?‎ ‎ A. Go to bed early . B. Eat more ice cream . C. Play computer games D. Watch TV B ‎ Tina is a beautiful girl .She lives (居住) in Shanghai . She is a student in No . 6 Middle School .‎ ‎ Tina gets up (起来) at six in the morning. She often has hamburgers for breakfast .After breakfast she goes to school . She likes tomatoes and chicken for lunch.‎ ‎ After school she often plays tennis with her friends. Sometimes they play volleyball. She comes home at five. She has supper with her parents at seven. ‎ ‎ At eight in the evening she does her homework .She goes to bed at ten. ‎ ‎6. Tina lives in ‎ A. London B. Shanghai C .Nanjing D. Beijing ‎ ‎7．Tina gets up at ‎ ‎ A . 6:00 B .6:10 C . 6:30 D、7：00‎ ‎8.She often has for breakfast.‎ A、hamburgers B、chicken C、tomatoes D、eggs ‎9.After breakfast she .‎ A、goes to work B、plays volleyball C、goes to school D、does her homework ‎10.After school she often plays tennis with .‎ A、her friends B、her brother C、her sister D、her parents C ‎ Breakfast Lunch Dinner Bob apples;‎ eggs Salad;‎ chicken French fries;‎ dumplings(水饺)‎ Gina eggs;‎ milk apples;‎ hamburgers salad;‎ chicken carrots Tony oranges;‎ bananas chicken;‎ pears dumplings;‎ eggs Grace eggs;‎ pears hamburgers;‎ chicken hamburgers;‎ carrots 根据表格内容，选择正确答案。‎ ‎11、Bob eats for lunch.‎ A、apples and eggs B、salad and chicken C、French fries and dumplings D、chicken and pears ‎12、 doesn’t eat eggs for breakfast.‎ A、Bob B、Gina C、Tony D、Grace ‎13、For dinner, Gina eats .‎ A、dumplings and eggs B、salad, chicken and carrots.‎ C、hamburgers, carrots and salad. D、apples and hamburgers ‎14、 doesn’t eat chicken for lunch A、Bob B、Gina C、Tony D、Grace ‎15、From the chart(从表格中),we know ‎ A、Bob has bananas for breakfast B、Gina has chicken and pears for lunch C、Bob and Tony have dumplings for dinner.‎ D、Gina and Grace have hamburgers for dinner 三、综合填空。‎ A、根据首字母提示完成单词。‎ ‎ Mr . and Mrs . Brown have a son and a d 1 . Their n 2 are David and Jane .They live in a big h 3 . There are three r 4 in the house . The big room is for Mr . and Mrs . Brown . The small rooms are David ’s and Jane’s . This is David’s room . There are nine s 5 balls and five basketballs .They are u 6 the bed . David likes sports .He p 7 with his friends e 8 day . That is Jane’s room . It’s a nice room . There are many books on the d 9 and there is a p 10 on the wall(墙) . ‎ ‎1. 2. 3. 4. ‎ ‎5. 6. 7. 8. ‎ ‎9. 10. ‎ B、用方框中所给的词填空。‎ ‎ dinner , like , lots of , don’t , or , meal , eggs , can , breakfast ‎ I don’t usually eat . I just have a cup of coffee . I don’t eat anything until (直到) about eleven o’clock . Then I have a . I have at about 6:30p.m . I’m a vegetarian（素食主义者）, so I don’t eat meat fish . I eat cheese and and things like that . At the weekend I usually go to a restaurant in the evening . You get vegetarian meals in a restaurant now .I Indian food , because they have things for vegetarians .‎ 四、任务型阅读，根据短文回答问题。‎ A ‎ Leo is sixty—six . But he looks young . He has two children –one is a son and the other is a daughter . He has 10 tennis rackets , 8 baseballs , 6 basketballs , 12 footballs and 18 volleyballs . But he never(从不) plays sports . He only likes collecting sports things . His son , Neal , likes soccer . He is a member of the city soccer club . H e plays soccer every day with his friends . And his daughter Nancy , likes volleyball . But she doesn’t play it . She watches it on TV !‎ 根据下列短文内容，回答问题。‎ ‎1. How many daughters does Leo have ? ‎ ‎2. Does Nancy have any brothers ? ‎ ‎3. Do Neal and Nancy like sports ? ‎ ‎4. Who plays soccer every day in Leo’s family ? ‎ ‎5. Does Nancy play volleyball ? ‎ B ‎ We do some shopping (购物) on Sundays (周日) . I often go to the supermarket with my mother on Sunday morning in a car . Father likes apples very much . We buy some apples for him . Mother likes yellow bananas , but they’re green . “ Look ! The strawberries are nice , mum . Do you like them ?” I say to mum , “ Yes , I do . ” Mother buys some for herself . The oranges are very nice . Mother buys some for me . I like oranges very much .‎ ‎ We need some vegetables .We buy some tomatoes , carrots and broccoli . I don’t like broccoli , but my parents like it . After shopping , mother and I have some French fries , milk and ice cream . And then we go back home with fruits and vegetables .‎ ‎6. Who likes apples very much ? ‎ ‎7. Why doesn’t mother buy any bananas ? ‎ ‎8. Whom does mother buy some oranges for ? ‎ ‎9. What do your parents like ? ‎ ‎10. What do you do after you buy the fruits and vegetables ? ‎ 五、书面表达。 ‎ ‎ 根据表格内容，用like/likes,don’t like/doesn’t like 写一篇短文，介绍 Mary Smith 家人的情况。（不少于80词）‎ people Food Sports father noodles √ ‎ rice × running √‎ playing football ×‎ mother meat ×‎ bread playing tennis √ ‎ playing basketball ×‎ Mary hamburger √ ‎ and potato chips √ ‎ vegetable × Swimming √ ‎ Tom meat fish × playing football √ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________________‎ 初一上册 Unit 7 How much are these pants? 导学案 课型：新授 教师寄语：Where there is a will , there is a way. 有志者，事竟成 ‎ Section A 课前预习 一． 预习目标::1.初步理解对话大意。2.理解掌握表示服装颜色的单词和短语。3.感知新语法: 询问价格 二． 预习过程：‎ ‎（一）。阅读对话，在文中划出下列新词汇，并注出音标和词义。‎ ‎ 试着朗读几遍，把不会的圈起来。‎ ‎1.sock 2.shirt 3.T-shirt 4. sweater 5.shoe 6.skirt 7.sale ‎ ‎8.dollar 9.example 10.color 11.black 12..white 13. red ‎ ‎14.green 15.blue 16.yellow 17.big 18.small 19.short 20.long 21. help 22. want 23.welcome ‎（二）。阅读对话，在文中划出下列短语，朗读并默写。‎ ‎1．多少（价钱）2.七美元 3.这件红色的毛衣 4.这条蓝色的裙子 5.这条黑色的裤子 6.那双蓝色的袜子，‎ ‎（三）。再读对话，在文中找出下列句子，并翻译成汉语。‎ ‎1.-How much is that white bag? -It’s nine dollars.2. Can I help you ? 3. What color do you want ? 4. Here you are . 5.I’ll take it.‎ ‎(四)。语言点导学导练：‎ ‎1．How much is this T-shirt? 这件T恤衫多少钱？‎ ‎(1)how much 常用来询问价格，其答语为It’s+价格或They’re+价格。It代单数名词或不可数名词，they 代替复数名词。例如：-How much is the black coat?-It’s eight dollars. --How much are these bananas?-They’re three dollars. (2) 询问价格还可以用What’s the price of…?该句中的price意为“价格”是名词即“ …… 多少钱 ? ”例如：What’s the price of the bike? 这辆自行车多少钱？(3)how much 还可对不可数名词的数量进行提问，意为”多少”,例如：How much milk do you want?你想要多少牛奶？ 运用：句型转换 ‎1）These apples are 3 dollars.(对画线部分提问) _____ _____ are these apples?‎ ‎ 2) There is a little water in the bottle.（同上）‎ ‎ ___________ ___________ _____________ _____________ there in the bottle?‎ ‎ 3) How much are these socks？（同义句）‎ ‎ __________ ____________ ______________ ______________these socks?‎ ‎ 2.-Can I help you?-Yes, please.I want a sweater.‎ ‎ (1) Can I help you?是商店、饭店等服务行业常用的服务用语，还可以说 What can I do for you?或 Is there anything I can do for you? (2) want 意思是“想要”, 其用法有：a. want sth 想要什么东西。b. want to do sth 想去做某事 。c. want sb to do sth 想要某人去做某事。 运用：选择 ‎1）--- ____________ --- Yes, please. I want a shirt for my son.‎ A. Can you help me? B. Do you want something？ C. Can I help you？‎ ‎2) He wants ____________ a shirt. A. buy B. to buy C. buying ‎ 3. I’ll take it. (1) I’ll 是I will 的缩写，will 是助动词，用来表示一般将来时。（2） 此句是选好商品并决定购买时的常用语。句中的take 意思是买，相当于buy. 另外 I’ll have it 也可表示同样的意思。例: --How much is this T-shirt?—It’s ten dollars. ---OK. I’ll take it.‎ Section A 课堂学习The First Period（SectionA 1a-----2c）‎ 学习目标：1. 会用本课所学重点单词和短语（表示服装和颜色）‎ ‎2. 理解背诵对话，能用所学词汇、句型进行情景口头表达和书面表达。 ‎ ‎3. 通过学习购物对话，懂得礼貌用语，学会如何感谢人。‎ 课堂学习过程：‎ 一．交流检查 交流检查课前预习情况，生生、师生互动互问探讨解决预习中存在的问题 ‎1. 默写重点单词和短语（3分钟） 2. 看图说话（购物图）3. 由购物图引入操练重点句型：‎ ‎1）--How much is this T-shirt? --It’s seven dollars.‎ ‎--How much are these socks? --They’re two dollars.‎ ‎2) –How much is that white bag？ --It’s nine dollars.‎ ‎ --How much are these black pants? --They’re ten dollars.‎ ‎ 二．自主学习 ‎ 1. Listen twice and complete 1b.‎ ‎ 2.Listen again and complete the dialogue.‎ A:___________ is the hat? B: The hat is six _________ .‎ A:And how much are the ________ ? B: Oh, they’re __________ dollars.‎ A:And the ________? How much is it? B:Let’s see. It is ______ dollars.‎ ‎ 3. Ss listen and repeat the dialogue. 4.Ss read aloud , and practise 1c in pairs.‎ ‎ 5.Ss listen twice and complete 2a and 2b.‎ ‎ 6.Ss listen to 2a and 2b again and complete 6 groups of dialogues:‎ ‎(1)A:How much is the _________________? B:It is ___________________.‎ ‎(2)A:How much is the __________________? B:It is ___________________.‎ ‎(3)A:How much is the __________________? B:They are ____________________.‎ ‎(4)A:I like this ______________. How much is it ? B:It is _____________________.‎ ‎(5)A:I like big blue ________. Do you have one ? B:Yes, I have this one here.‎ A:How much is it? B:It’s ______________________.‎ ‎(6)A:I like those long, blue and yellow _________. How much are they?‎ ‎ B: They are only ____________________________.‎ ‎7.Ss read aloud the 6 dialogues, 8. Practise 2c freely in pairs.‎ 三．交流展示-------解疑答惑 ‎ 同学们通过自主学习你遇到了那些难题，请提出来吧 ‎1. 小组内讨论解决。2. 班内交流解决 。3。教师解释。‎ ‎ 四．巩固练习1.Ask and answer (师生问答) --How much is …? ---It’s…‎ ‎ --How much are…? --They’re…‎ ‎ 2.。单项选择 ‎ 1）--____ is this skirt? --It’s 6 dollars. A How many B.How much C. What money ‎ 2).How much are _________? A. this pants B. that bag C. those socks ‎ 3) –How much is the red sweater--Fifteen______.A. pound B. yuans C. dollars ‎ ‎ 3. 翻译句子（汉译英） 1) 这条裙子多少钱？ 2) 这个书包仅售50元。‎ ‎ 3) 那双蓝色的袜子多少钱？‎ ‎ 4)--- 这条蓝色的裤子多少钱？ --- 12美元。 ‎ ‎ 5) ---你那个黑色手提包 ？ ---9 元。 ‎ ‎ 五．拓展延伸：课下归纳表示颜色和服装类的单词 （查字典） ‎ The Second period (Section A part 3—4)‎ 课堂学习过程:‎ 一．复习检查：1. 听写单词和短语 2. 复习重点句型（师生问答）‎ ‎3. 引入重点句型和对话（3a）‎ 二自主学习：1. 补全对话（3a）‎ ‎2. Listen and repeat (3a)‎ ‎3. Recite the dialogue (3a)‎ ‎4. Practise the conversation (3b)‎ 三．交流展示: Discuss language difficulties in group to help each other.‎ ‎1.小组内讨论解决。2.班内交流解决 3.教师解释 四．训练巩固 ‎1.Recite the dialogue (3a) together.‎ ‎2.将下列单词排列，组成正确的句子。‎ ‎1）fifteen , hats , for ,black ,we ,dollars ,have . 。‎ ‎2) color, do, want, what, you ____________________________?‎ ‎ 3）much, her, jacket, is. how, ___________________________?‎ ‎ 4) you, do, a., sweater, want, green __________________________ ?‎ ‎ 5) have, in, and, red, yellow, shorts, _______________________________.‎ ‎3.从方框中选择适当的句子补全对话。‎ A: 1_____________________________________‎ B； Yes, please. I want a shirt for my son.‎ A: We have shirts in red , yellow and white. 2__________________________________‎ B: Yellow.‎ A: 3__________________________________________________‎ B： Oh, this one is too small. 4___________________________________________‎ A: Yes. What about this one?‎ B: It’s very nice. 5_________________________________________________‎ A: It’s ten dollars.‎ B: OK. 6_____________________________ Thank you.‎ A: You’re welcome.‎ ‎¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬¬4.完成句子 ‎1）我就买这条黄裙子，谢谢。 I’ll _______ _________ ________ ________, thank you.‎ ‎2) 那双红鞋多少钱？ _________ _________ _________ the red ___________？‎ ‎3) 那些黑色的裤子太长了。The ________ _________ __________too _____________.‎ 五．拓展延伸：‎ 模仿课文中3a部分，写一个购物对话（可参考3b中的物品和价格）。 ‎ Section B 课前预习 一、预习目标：1.初步理解对话、短文大意。2.理解记忆新词和短语。3.感知理解新语法。‎ 二、预习过程：‎ ‎（一） 阅读对话和短文，在文中划出下列新词汇，并注出音标和词义。试着朗读几遍，将不会的圈起来。‎ ‎1. ten 2.eleven 3.twelve 4.thirteen 5.fourteen 6. fifteen 7.sixteen. 8. seventeen 9.eighteen 10. nineteen 11. twenty 12. clothes 13. store 14. come 15. buy 16. sell 17. afford 18.see. 19. each 20.anybody 21.our 22. yourself 23. from 24. Mr 25. sorry ‎(二) 阅读对话、短文，在文中划出下列短语，朗读并默写。‎ ‎1，多少钱 2.以合理的价钱 3， 有只买12元的很好的包 4. 看一看 5.廉价出售 6. 在华兴服装店 7红颜色的 ‎(三)阅读短文3b, 判断句子正误（T or F）‎ ‎ 1. ( ) The sweaters are only 12 dollars.‎ ‎ 2. ( ) They have socks for boys.‎ ‎ 3 .( ) The girls can buy T-shirts in white in this store.‎ ‎ 4. ( ) Nobody can afford the prices.‎ ‎　5 （ ）We can buy great bags for only 12 yuan.‎ ‎（四）主要语言点导学导练 ‎ 1.twenty-five , thirty-one 二十五,三十一 在英语中, 表示二十以上的两位数时应用“几十加个位的基数词”,在十位数和个位数之间写上连词符号“-”，但不发音。‎ ‎ 2.（1）buy 表示“ 买、购买”“给某人买某物”可以说成buy sb.Sth.或 buy sth. for sb. 例如： My parents want to buy me a new computer.‎ ‎ =My parents want to buy a new computer for me.‎ ‎ 我父母想给我买台新电脑。‎ ‎（2）sell 表示“卖、销售”是buy 的反义词。sell sb. Sth.=sell sth. to sb., 表示把某物卖给某人。例如：They want to sell us the car. =They want to sell the car to us.‎ ‎ 他们想把汽车卖给我们。‎ ‎（3）afford 表示“负担得起、买得起”常与can, could, be able to 连用，多用于否定句、疑问句中。例如：‎ ‎ We can’t afford so much money for the house. 我们付不起那么多钱买房子。‎ ‎ Can you afford a new rings? 你买得起一个新戒指吗？‎ 运用：从方框中选词，并用其适当形式填空。‎ ‎ ‎ afford sell buy ‎1)I want ________________ a new pen because that one is broken.‎ ‎2), I have two rules and I want to________ one..‎ ‎3). The book is too dear (贵的) ，We can’t________ it.‎ ‎3. We have T—shirts in red, green and white for only ￥18！ 本句中in是介词，in 后接表示颜色的词，表示“穿……颜色的“ 例如：The woman in black is my aunt.‎ 运用：选择 ‎1） We all know the girl______a red dress A. with B. in C.wear ‎2) My English teacher is always_______black ‎ A.wear B.of C . in ‎ Section B 课堂学习The FirstPeriod (1a-2c)‎ 学习目标：1. 会用本课所学四会单词和短语。‎ ‎2. 阅读理解短文并能复述，能用所学词汇、句型进行情景口头表达和书面表达。‎ ‎3. 情感策略目标：懂得礼貌地感谢人。‎ 课堂学习过程：‎ 一．交流检查：交流检查课前预习情况，生生、师生讨论解决预习中存在的问题。‎ ‎1. 大卡片检查单词短语记忆情况。 2. 单词与数字匹配（ 1a, 1b）‎ ‎3. 引入操练句型：A: How much are the red socks ? B: They’re 8 dollars.‎ ‎ 二．自主学习: 1. Read 1a, 1b aloud 2. Listen twice and complete 2a, 2b.‎ ‎ 3.Listen again and fill in the blanks to complete the following dialogue:‎ Mom: Oh, look. I like that blue ___________ . How much is it?‎ Liso: _____________dolars. Oh, look. I like these _____________.‎ Mom: Oh, no. I don’t like _____________________.‎ Liso:Do you like this?‎ Mom: Mmm, yes, I do. But it’s _____________dollars.‎ Liso:Oh. How much is the __________ sweater?‎ Mom: It’s _________ dollars. But you have a _________ sweater.‎ Liso: Mmm.‎ Mom: Oh, look at these ______________________.‎ Liso:Oh, yes. I like __________. How much are they? ‎ Mom: Only _________________ dollars.‎ Liso:OK. I’ll ________________ those.‎ ‎ 4.Ss read aloud the filled dialoge for about 4 minutes in pairs or alone.‎ ‎ 5.Ss pratice 2c freely in pairs with more things.‎ ‎ 三．交流展示：1.小组内讨论解决学习疑难。 2.班内交流解决 3.教师解释 ‎ 四．训练巩固 1.单项选择。‎ ‎1）--____ is the bike ? --Just 150 dollars. A.How much B.How many C.How long ‎ ‎ 2) –I want a pair of pants. --__________________‎ ‎ A. Here you are B. Here are you C. Give you ‎ ‎ 3) It’s the best ____ of year to visit Beijing. A.day B.time C.cheap ‎ 4) What’s the ______ of the house ? A.dollars B.price C. money ‎ ‎ 5) ___________ shoes do you want ? A,What price B.Which C.How much ‎ 3. 补全对话。 将方框中的选项填在每个空白处，使对话意思完整。‎ ‎ A. I’ll take it B. Can I help you C. What about this one ?D How much is it ? E. Here you are ‎ A: Good morning 。__1____________________‎ ‎ B: Good morning . I’m looking for a pen .Would you please show me that hero pen?‎ ‎ A: Certainly . 2 _____________________ It’s of very good quality ‎ B: Hm, it looks nice .3 _______________________‎ ‎ A: It’s 15 yuan.‎ ‎ B: But that’s too expensive. Do you have any cheaper ones ?‎ ‎ A: 4 ___________________ It’s a Hero pen , too. But it’s only 10 yuan.‎ ‎ B: Let me have a look . Oh, it’s of good quality, too. 5 ________________________ ‎ 五． 拓展延伸 用适当的基数词完成下面的等式 （数字用英语写出）。‎ ‎1. six +_____________ = twenty-nine ‎2. thirty-one –fourteen =___________________‎ ‎3. _____________ + thirteen = twenty-five ‎4. three × six = _____________________‎ ‎5. thirty ÷ two =____________________‎ ‎ The Second Period ( Section B 3a---4)‎ 课堂学习过程 一．复习检查：1. 默写单词 2. 复习上节课所学句型及语法（基数词） 3. 导入新课 ‎ 重点短语和句型：1. at Huaxing clothes store 2. at a very good price ‎ ‎3. We have great bags for only￥12 4. We have T-shirt’s in red.‎ ‎5. Any body can afford our prices 二自主学习 ‎1. Read carefully an fill in the price tags (3a)‎ ‎2. Listen and repeat loudly.‎ ‎3. Read the passage aloud alone.‎ 三 交流展示 1 小组内讨论解决学习疑难 2 班内交流解决 3 教师解释 四 训练巩固 ‎1 Retell the passage (3a)‎ ‎2 单项选择 ‎ 1) _____________, where is the clothes store ?‎ ‎ A. Excuse me B. I’m sorry C. Hi D. Hello ‎ 2) You can _____________ socks in all colors ___________ that shop.‎ ‎ A buy , from B. sell , to C. buy , to D. sell , from ‎ 3) –Can I help you ? --__________________.‎ ‎ A.No, not B. Don’t help me C Yes , please D. Yes , help me ‎ ‎ 4）They always sell their clothes______________ a very high price.‎ ‎ A. in B. for C. on D. at ‎ 5) You don’t believe it? Come and see __________________‎ ‎ A. in yourself B. of yourself C. on yourself D. for yourself ‎3. 汉译英：1）我们有各种颜色的帽子。____________________________________________‎ ‎ 2）这件毛衣价格便宜。_________________________________________________‎ ‎ 3）那件白衬衫仅卖三十元。______________________________________________‎ ‎ 4) 她的新毛衣是蓝白相间的 ____________________________________________‎ ‎ 5) 你能支付得起价格吗？_______________________________________________‎ ‎4. 写作 : Write an advertisement (3b)‎ 五．拓展延伸 ： Part 4 Groupwork (课本) ‎ Unit 7 单元语言知识综合训练和综合运用课 (Self Check) ‎ 一．语言知识综合练习 根据句意和单词的首字母写单词 ‎ 1． How m_______ is the ruler ?‎ ‎ 2. I don’t want a long ruler. I want a s_________ one.‎ ‎ 3.--What c___________ is your T-shirt ? --It’s white.‎ ‎ 4. –Can I h _______you? --Yes , please.‎ ‎ 5. We can’t a____________ the prices.‎ ‎ 6.Mrs Chen is in a c___________ store. She wants to buy a sweater.‎ ‎ 7. A lot of new books are on s__________ in Xinhua bookstore.‎ ‎ 8. –Thank you very much . --You are w____________.‎ ‎ 9. Come to Hualian and see for y___________.‎ ‎ 10. She often goes to the supermarket to b________ some food.‎ 二 从方框中选词填空。‎ ‎ ‎ A: Do you 1 __________ pants for girls?‎ B: Yes .We have pants 2 ______________ colors, red, black, green, blue and white. What color do you 3 ____________?‎ A: I like white and blue .And 4 ____________ much are these white 5 ________________ ？‎ B: Twenty dollars. And those in 6 _______________ are fifteen dollars.‎ A: I’ll 7 ______________ those blue pants. Fifteen dollars, here you are.‎ B: OK. Here 8 _____________ your 9 _______________.‎ A: Thank you.‎ B: 10 ________________ welcome.‎ 三． 单项选择。从A,B,C,D 四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳答案。‎ ‎（ ）1. You can see some T-shirts _______ a good price at this storre.‎ ‎ A. in B. at C.on D. of ‎ ( ) 2. Boys and girls , please come and see for _______ at Mr Cool’s Clothes Store.‎ ‎ A. you B. your C. yours D. yourselves ‎ ( ) 3. My uncle has only _________ red sweater.‎ ‎ A. first B.one C. last D. twelve ‎（ ）4.Your skirt is very nice. Let me have a look at ______________‎ ‎ A.it B. them C.her D.him ‎ ( ) 5. Jenny’s socks ____________three dollars.‎ ‎ A. have B. does C.is D.are ‎ ( 　)6. Mary __________ a white jacket from Huaxing Clothes Store. ‎ ‎ A. buys B. sells C. sees D. helps ‎ ( )7. Does your brother want _________ basketball after school ?‎ ‎ A. play B. plays C. to play D. playing ‎ ( )8. The white ____________ is only two dollars , so I’ll take it for my brother.‎ ‎ A. shoes B. socks C. skirt D. hat ‎ ‎ ( )9. This blue skirt is only 10 dollars , I can _________ its price .‎ ‎ A. help B. afford C. look D. play ‎ ‎ ( )10 . --Thank you very much. --_____________.‎ ‎ A.Don’t say that B. You’re welcome C. Here you are .D. That’s right 四． 句子改写 根据所给要求改写下列句子， 每空限填一词。‎ ‎1. Can I help you ( 改为同义句) _________ __________ I do ___________ you ？‎ ‎2. How much are the shoes ? ( 改为同义句) _________ _________ ___________ of the shoes?‎ ‎3. The boy in the white sweater is Tony. (对划线部分提问) ________ __________ is Tony.‎ ‎4. The socks are five yuan. (对划线部分提问) ___________ ___________ are the socks?‎ ‎5. This soccer is black and blue . (对划线部分提问) __________ __________ is the soccer?‎ 五． 翻译句子 将下列句子译成英语。‎ ‎1. 我们有极好的衬衫，仅售 50 美元。_____________________________________________________________‎ ‎2. 我们有女孩需要的各种颜色的毛衫。______________________________________________________________‎ ‎3. 这家商店的鞋子物美价廉。 ______________________________________________________________________‎ ‎4. 你认识穿蓝裤子的那个男孩吗？ _________________________________________________________________‎ ‎5 我想知道这俩黑色轿车的价格。__________________________________________________________________-‎ 六．完成对话 根据语境选择适当的选项完成下面的对话。‎ A: Good morning , Madam. ____________________‎ B: Yes , please . I’d like some orange , please.‎ A: How many would you like ? B: Um, six, please. ______________‎ A: Yes ,over. there. B: How much are they？‎ A: 1. 6 a kilo. B: __________‎ A: Here you are .Anything else ?‎ B: Yes , I’d like a cabbage and two kilos of potatoes.‎ A: ____________ B: Yes , thanks. _________________‎ A: Let’s see now. That’s 2.35. B: Here you are .‎ A: Thanks very much. B: Goodbye.‎ ‎ A. Is that all ? B. Can I help you ? C. How much are they?‎ ‎ D. Have you got any grapes? E. I’d like half a kilo , please.‎ 二．语言综合运用 ‎1. Read the ad and fill in the price tags ( Self Check part3, 课本 P46)‎ ‎2 Just for fun ( Self Check )‎ ‎3.写作 ； 下面表格是Lucy 星期天所买得东西及花的钱数，请根据表格写一篇短文把它叙述出来，词数50左右 （开头已给出）‎ 物品 钱数 手包 $11.00‎ 袜子 $2.00‎ 毛衣 $21.00‎ 裤子 $27.00‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Lucy goes shopping on Sundays. She buys ________________________________________________________‎ ‎_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 初一英语同步阅读与写作训练 ( Unit 7 )‎ A. 阅读部分 （A） 阅读短文，选择正确的答案。‎ Mr Jenkins is in a clothing shop . He is going to buy a coat. The shop assistant (店员 ) isn’t there , so he is standing near the counter (柜台) and waiting for her.。 A young woman is standing near the counter, too. She looks at Mr Jenkins and says to him , “Excuse me .“ ”Yes ？“ Mr Jenkins asks .”Are you going to do something for me? I want a coat .” “And you must help me . That is your work .” Mr Jenkins says kindly.“It’s not my work .I want a coat ,too . I’m a customer, I’m not a shop assistant .‎ ‎( ) 1 The young woman is looking at ________________‎ ‎ A. a coat B. the counter C. young woman D. woman ‎( )2. The young woman thinks Mr Jenkins is going to _________________‎ ‎ A. leave the shop B. take a coat C. work for her D. speak to her ‎( )3. From the passage we know the shop assistant is a ____________‎ ‎ A. boy B.man C. young woman D. woman ‎( )4. Why does the young woman want Mr Jenkins to help her?‎ ‎ A. Because she thinks he is the shop assistant . B. Because Mr Jenkins is a man.‎ ‎ C. Because she is standing near the counter. D. Because she wants to buy a coat.‎ ‎( )5. The customer in Chinese is _______ A. 店主 B. 营业员 C. 顾客 D. 服务员 ‎ (B) 阅读短文，然后根据内容判断正误(T or F)‎ ‎ Mr and Mrs Scott want to buy some new chairs for their new house. They come into a shop and see some very good chairs on the floor . They like the color and want to know how much they are. They see a price tag ( 标签 ) on one chair . It says “ ～ 100 “ 。They like the chairs but they are too expensive (贵) for them. The Scotts don’t think they can buy them now. They leave this shop and go to other shops . Mr Scott thinks they can find some cheap chairs.‎ ‎( ) 6.Mr and Mrs Scott have a new house .‎ ‎( )7.They want to buy tables and chairs for their new house .‎ ‎( )8.They think the chairs in this shop are cheap.‎ ‎( )9.They leave the shop and go home .‎ ‎( )10.They want to buy cheap chairs.‎ ‎( C ) 阅读下面表格， 然后根据表格内容选择正确答案。‎ Thing baseball basketball bat baseball glove sports shoes sports clothes Price $ 8 $ 4.5 $6 $10 $30‎ ‎ ( )11. If you want to buy a basketball bat and a pair of sports shoes, you need______________.‎ ‎ A. $ 8 B.$ 18 C. $ 2.5 D. $22.5‎ ‎( )12. If you want a baseball and a pair of baseball gloves, you need___________.‎ ‎ A. $20 B. $ 14 C. $22 D. $ 17‎ ‎( )13. If you want a baseball , a pair of bats , you need ___________‎ ‎ A.$ 20 B. $ 17 C. $ 22 D. $ 12.5‎ ‎( )14. If you want a baseball ., a bat ., a pair of gloves and a pair of shoes, you need ______________________________‎ ‎ A. $28 B.$34.5 C. $ 28.5 D. $18‎ ‎( )15. If you want all above , you need about ______________.‎ ‎ A. $50 B. $ 70 C. $ 80 D. $ 60 ‎ ‎ ( D) 阅读下面短文，然后从各小题所给的四个选项中选出一个最佳答案。‎ ‎ Mike Henderson is a college (学院) student in New York city . This weekend he plans to study for an exam, but he doesn’t want to study . He just wants to have fun. On Friday night he dances. On Saturday morning he plays tennis with his friends Keith. On Saturday afternoon his friends call him , and they have a party in his friend Roger’s home. On Sunday he goes to see a movie. The name of the movie is “Cloudy Monday “ . Mike doesn’t like it . It is a comedy, and Mike doesn’t like comedies very much.‎ ‎ At last , on Sunday night, Mike studies for the exam. He studies from six in the evening to two in the morning. On Monday morning, Mike goes to school and takes the exam. He is tired and now he is sorry that he didn’t study. ‎ ‎( )16. Where does Mike live ? A.College .B.England. C America.D.At home.‎ ‎( )17. What does “exam “ in Chinese ? A. 游戏 B.考验 C.考试 D 面试 ‎( )18. Mike wants to ______________‎ ‎ A. study for the exam B. have fun C. sleep D. see a comedy ‎( )19. Mike studies _______________ on Sunday night .‎ ‎ A eight hours B. from six in the morning to two in the evening ‎ C. nine hours D. all the time ‎(　　　)20. How many things does Mike do on the weekend?‎ ‎ A .Four . B. Five . C. Six. D. Seven. ‎ ‎(E ) 阅读下面短文，然后从各小题所给的四个选项中选出一个最佳答案。‎ ‎ Susan has three dollars ～the pocket money ( 零花钱 ) she had saved up (节省 )。She wants to buy a birthday present for her father. She comes to a big shop. She looks at the goods ( 商品 ) in the shop window and thinks , “ I should give him something to wear.”‎ ‎ “Can I help you . little girl ?” says the shopper , Mr Green . “Yes , please . I’m looking for a present for my dad ,” says Susan, “But I don’t know what to buy.“ Mr Green shows her a nice shirt and says , “ What about this？”“No , I have only three dollars,” says Susan. Then she sees a beautiful white tie .She knows her father would like it . She wants to get it , but it might be very dear, she is afraid. “ How much is it ?” she asks. Mr Green looks at her for a while and then ‎ he takes off the price tag (价签) and says, “ That’s just three dollars . “ Oh , frne!” Susan said happily.,“ I’ll take it.”‎ ‎ ( ) 21.Susan wants to buy ________________.‎ ‎ A. a skirt B. something to wear C. a shirt D. a present for her dad ‎ ( )22.Hom much does Susan have?‎ ‎ A. About 3 dollars B. Less than 3 dollars.‎ ‎ C. More than 3 dollars D. only 3 dollars ‎ ( )23. Mr Green is ______________.‎ ‎ A. the salesman B. the shopkeeper C. a neighbor D. a friend ‎ ( ) 24. At last , Susan buys __________________‎ ‎ A a shirt B. a tie C. a tag D. a pair of shoes ‎ ( ) 25. From the story we know that Mr Green is ______________‎ ‎ A. kind B. bad C. tall D. fat ‎( F ) 根据表格内容选择正确选项。‎ Tiantian Clothes Store Clothes Color Price pants white, blue $ 16‎ shoes black, brown $ 20‎ skirt red, yellow $32‎ socks white, black, red $6‎ shirt orange, blue $28‎ ‎ ( ) 26. The prices of a skirt and a shirt are _______‎ ‎ A.$ 36 B. $60 C. $ 50 D. $ 38‎ ‎ ( ) 27. Lucy likes white and she only has $10, she can buy _____________.‎ A. a pair of pants B.a pair of shoes C.a pair of socks D.a skirt ‎ ( )28. People can buy __________ at this store.‎ ‎ A.yellow pants B. a white shirt C. a black skirt D. browm shoes ‎ ( )29. Mrs Brown has $40 and she can buy ___________ with it.‎ ‎ A .pants and shoes B. a shirt and shoes C.two shirts D. socks , shoes and pants ‎ ( ) 30. 下面哪项陈述是正确的？‎ A. You can buy socks for only $3 at Tiantian Clothes Store.‎ B. They have sweaters at a good price at Tiantian Clothes Store.‎ C. The yellow skirt is $32‎ D. If you have $50, you can buy a red skirt and black shoes.‎ B. 写作部分 ‎1. 从所给的选项中选择恰当的句子完成对话。注意有多余的选项。‎ ‎ ‎ A. How much do they cost ？、‎ B. Can I try them on . please?‎ C. Hmm. Have you got any other kind ?‎ D. Size 10.‎ E. That’s too expensive .‎ F. I’m looking for a pair of black shoes.‎ G. What color is it ?‎ ‎ A: What can I do for you ? B: 1__________‎ ‎ A: What size do you want ? B: 2 ____________‎ ‎ A: I’m afraid we haven’t got any black shoes in that size ‎ B: 3 __________________‎ ‎ A: What about those shoes over? B: 4 _______________________‎ ‎ A: Fifty yuan . B ：5 _____________________‎ ‎ A: Yes , you can. B: OK. I’ll take them.‎ ‎2. 请用下面的问题采访你的朋友Tom , 然后将答语改写成一篇介绍商品价格的文章。‎ ‎1）Do you often go to the supermarket on weekends., Tom ?‎ ‎2）How much is the bread ? 3）How much is the milk?‎ ‎4）How much are the eggs? 5）How much are the apples ?‎ ‎6）How much are the oranges ? 7）How much are the tomatoes ?‎ ‎8）How much is the meat ?‎ ‎ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 初一上册Unit8 When is your birthday?‎ 课型新授 ‎ 教师寄语:我不一定是最好的，但我一定是最努力的。‎ Section A 课前预习 一、 预习目标：‎ ‎1、初步理解对话。2、理解记忆新词和短语。3、感知理解新语法。‎ 二、 预习过程：‎ ‎1、按顺序写出十二个月份，并比较一些单词的构成规则。（预习1a）‎ ‎1月 2月 3月 4月 ‎ ‎5月 6月 7月 8月 ‎ ‎9月 10月 11月 12月 ‎ 通过预习你认为比较难掌握的是 。‎ ‎2、使用when引导的特殊疑问句询问日期（1b）‎ ‎①根据答语写出问句 ‎— ？‎ ‎¬—My birthday is April 12th.‎ ‎②填写正确的日期 ‎ is Teachers Day.‎ ‎3、序数词的应用（2a）‎ 用括号中数字的正确形式填空。‎ ‎①Our school trip is October (1).‎ ‎②March (8)is Women’s Day (妇女节)。‎ ‎③September is the (9) month of the year.‎ ‎④My sister is (12)years old.‎ ‎⑤It’s Wang Hong’s (13)birthday. Happy birthday to her !‎ 与同学相互交流答案。‎ ‎4、写出下列日期的英文表达。‎ ‎1．5月6日 2．10月10日 ‎ ‎3．7月10日 4．12月8日 ‎ ‎5．3月19日 6．1月9日 ‎ 通过预习你认为英语日期的表达与汉语日期的表达有何不同？‎ 知识讲解：日期的表达 一．英语的日期的表达比较常用的主要有以下两种：1、按“日、月、年”的顺序排列。例如：“2009年10月1日”应表达为“1st October, 2009”。2、按“月、日、年”顺序排列。例如：“2009年10月1日”应表达为“October 1st,2009”。‎ 二．我们表达日期的时候还要注意以下两点：1、年月日中的“日”可以用序数词来表达，可使用缩写形式。序数词的缩写形式就是其对应的阿拉伯数字后跟序数词最后两个英语字母。例如：first-1st, second-2nd, twentieth-20th。2、月份的表达可以用它们的全写，也可以用它们的缩写形式。例如：October 1st, 2009-Oct. 1st, 2009 。月份的缩写形式一般为其单词的前三个字母并在第三个字母后面右下角加“.”。例如：January-Jan. ，February-Feb.。但是May ，July没有缩写形式。 ‎ Unit8 The First Period (Section A1a-2d)‎ 学习目标：1、通过学习掌握日期的表达方式并运用所学知识谈论生日。2、掌握并灵活运用句型：①When is your birthday? –My birthday is …②Ask the other students their birthdays and ages . ‎ 课堂学习过程：‎ 一、交流检查1、通过预习，尚未掌握住的知识有 。运用教材或词典把未了解的知识解决。‎ ‎2、把十二个月份按季节分类。‎ spring summer ‎ autumn winter ‎ 二．语言点导学 思考讨论1、你知道英语中的序数词是表示什么的吗？2、基数词变序数词有什么规律？‎ 妙语讲解：1、英语中数词可分为基数词和序数词，基数词即一、二、五、十三等，而序数词则表示第一、第二、第五、第十三等。‎ ‎2、基数词变序数词的一般规律是：在基数词后加th，如six—sixth、seven—seventh但也有一些特殊的，这些特殊变法可归纳如下：‎ 一二三特殊记，词尾字母t, d ,d， th要从四加起，如何加很容易。‎ 八减t，九去e, f来把ve替，ty变成tie. 若是遇到几+几,只变个位就可以。‎ 三、 课堂学习 ‎1、Listen to1b and number, then listen and repeat, read aloud and practise 1c freely in pairs.‎ ‎2、Listen to 2a and repeat . ‎ ‎3、Listen to 2b and circle , then listen to 2c and match.‎ ‎4. Listen to 2b and 2c again and complete the following dialogue:‎ ‎ A: Now, let’s _________ in the class birthday calendar. Leila, when’s your birthday?‎ ‎ B: It’s ____________________ the 5th, Mr Fisher.‎ ‎ A: Oh, OK. And how about you, Nick.‎ ‎ C : _____________ 4th.‎ ‎ A: And Robert?‎ ‎ D: Mr birthday is __________________ .‎ A: January 17th. OK. And Jane, when’s your _______________ ?‎ E: _______________________________.‎ ‎5.Listen and repeat,. then read aloud alone . ‎ ‎6.Ss practise 2d in pairs freely with own situations.‎ 巩固练习：用英语写出下列序数词 第一 第二 第三 第五 ‎ 第八 第十二 第九 第二十四 ‎ 知识拓展：1、序数词的缩写形式为：阿拉伯数字+序数词的最后两个字母，如：1st,10th,22nd……；‎ 在一般情况下，序数词的前面要加the,但当前面有my, his ,her 等形容词性物主代词或者this ,that等指示代词时，则不再加the。‎ ‎2、两两互动，同位之间相互读写数字1—30序数词，然后交换角色。‎ ‎3、用所给单词的适当形式填空 ‎①、—When is (he) birthday ? —It ‘s September 2nd.‎ ‎②、— (Tony) English is good. —Yes ,I think so.‎ ‎③、April is the (four) month of a year.‎ Unit8 The Second Period (Section A 3a-4)‎ 学习目标：1、询问日期的信息。2、记忆短语。3、使用自己的姓名、年龄和生日信息。‎ 学习过程：‎ 一、自我复习检查，迅速写出1-12个月份和1-31的序数词完整写法，同学之间互相检查并将出现的错误重新记忆。‎ 二、语言点导学：‎ ‎1、名词所有格 ‎（1）单数名词词尾或不以s结尾的复数名词，加“’s”。‎ ‎（2）以s 结尾的复数名词，只加“’”即可。‎ ‎（3）如果两个并列名词，且其后分别有’s，则表示：两者分别有……；若只有一个’s，则表示：两者共有……‎ ‎2、将短语译成英语。‎ ‎①妈妈的生日 ②出生日期 ‎ ‎③你父亲的生日 ④李萍的生日 ‎ ‎⑤生日快乐 ⑥多大年纪，几岁 ‎ ‎3、根据实际情况回答下列问题：‎ ‎①When is your birthday? ‎ ‎②When is your mother’s birthday? ‎ ‎③when is your father’s birthday? ‎ 三、自主学习 ‎1.Make conversations according to the example, then read aloud, ‎ Name : Jackie Chan Date of Birth : April 7th ‎_When is Jackie’s birthday? _His birthday is April seventh.‎ ‎①Name : Guo Jingjing.‎ Date of Birth : October 15th ‎— — ‎ ‎②Name :Yao Ming Date of Birth : September 12th.‎ ‎— — ‎ ‎③Name: He Jie Date of Birth: March 25th.‎ ‎— — ‎ ‎2. Practise 3b freely in pairs with own real information.‎ 四、 拓展延伸：‎ 询问班内其它同学的生日和年龄，按从小到大的顺序排队。‎ Unit8 Section B 课前预习 一、 预习目标：‎ ‎1、学会几个重要短语。2、when what 引导的特殊疑问句的使用。‎ 二、预习过程：‎ ‎1、 英汉互译，阅读对话和短文，找出下列短语 ‎1演讲比赛 2学校郊游 ‎ ‎3在你们学校 4篮球比赛 ‎ ‎5生日聚会 6艺术/音乐节 ‎ ‎7……岁 8举办一次校庆日 ‎ ‎9排球比赛 10学校庆祝日 ‎ ‎11从…到… 12 the other ‎ ‎13line up 14match …with… ‎ ‎15find out 16at the age of ‎ ‎17语文竞赛 18英语聚会 ‎ ‎19一张纸 20Dave’s birthday party ‎ ‎2、 翻译句子，阅读对话和短文，找出下列句子：‎ ‎1在你学校有一个学校庆祝日吗？ ‎ ‎2你们有艺术节吗？ ‎ ‎3我的生日是1月1日。 ‎ ‎4我喜欢棒球和排球。 ‎ 三．预习自测 ‎1、When is your English ? ‎ A, book B. name C. party ‎2、My birthday is , ‎ A. June forth B. June fourth C. July four ‎3、 your birthday March 1st? ‎ A. It’s B. What’s C. Is ‎4、I have a baseball bat .‎ A. not B. am not C. don’t ‎5、I was born November ,1989. ‎ ‎ A. on B. in C./‎ ‎6、I have .‎ A. am not ; watches B. don’t ;watch C. don’t; a watch ‎7、—Where are the two sweaters?‎ ‎—I can’t find them.‎ A. sister B. sisters’ C. sisters’s ‎8、The letter in the word” possible” is” i”?‎ A. five B. second C. fifth ‎9、I was born July 2 and my birthday is coming soon.‎ A. on B .in C. at Unit8 The First Period (Section B1-2c)‎ 一、学习目标： ①会用本课的单词短语。②复习、巩固日期的询问和应答；学会谈论自己、同学以及父母家人的生日；并学会自己安排作息时间。‎ 二、课堂学习过程 ‎（一）自主学习：‎ ‎1.Listen twice and complete 2a and 2b. ‎ ‎2.Listen again and fill in the blanks in the dialogue:‎ ‎ Joe: Hey, Sally. Can you _______ me fill in my calendar ?‎ Sally: ________, Joe.‎ Joe: When is your birthday ____________ ?‎ Sally My birthday party is ____________________.‎ Joe: OK, and when is the ____________________ game?‎ Sally: The basketball game ? Oh, it’s _______________________.‎ Joe: Good. And, um, how about the school ___________________ ?‎ Sally The school trip is ______________________ and 27th.‎ Joe: And When’s the ____________ ____________________?‎ Sally: Oh, that’s _______________ , September 29th.‎ Joe: Great!‎ ‎3.Listen the fourth time and repeat, then read aloud the filled dialogue alone or in pairs.‎ ‎4.Ss pracise 2c freely with their own real informations. ‎ ‎（二） 当堂检测，‎ A.下列各句均有一处错误，请指出并改正。‎ ‎1、His friend name is Peter. 2、John is fourteen year old. ‎ ‎3、Her birthday is July twenty. ‎ ‎4、—What in Mary’s birthday? —It’s October 1st. ‎ ‎5、We have a Art Festival each year. ‎ B.根据句意及首字母提示补全单词 ‎1、Can you come to Tony’s birthday p ?‎ ‎2、Do you have an Art F at your school?‎ ‎3、Today is Sunday, October t , Tomorrow is Nov ember 1st.‎ ‎4、—When is the English s contest? —It’s May 4th.‎ ‎5、Joe ,when is the school t ?‎ C. 按要求改写以下句子：‎ ‎（1）My mother is forty years old (就画线的部分提问) ________is your mother?‎ ‎(2)Tom’s birthday is September 12th (同上) Tom’s birthday?‎ ‎(3)There are twelve months in a year .(同上)‎ ‎ months in a year?‎ ‎(4)How old are you ?(同义句) ?‎ D. 用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1．Her birthday is May (eight). 2．Is (Peter)birthday May 16th?‎ ‎3．My sister is thirteen (year) old. 4．The (five) girl in the picture is her cousin.‎ ‎5．It’s (Leila) family tree. 6．Aunt Liu is those two (boy) mother .‎ ‎7．Mr. Brown is (Lucy and Lily) father.‎ Unit8 The Second Period (Section B 3a-4)‎ 学习目标：1、课前限时默写预习中的单词短语。2、复习生日的表达及询问。3、根据时间表按排自己的日程。‎ 课堂学习：‎ ‎1、3a 结对活动，学生A阅读51页的日程表，学生B阅读82页日程表，‎ 互相提问完成日表格提问问题。‎ ‎2、3b 结对活动，根据学校设立的如下活动完成3b表格。‎ ‎-Do you have a School Day at your school?‎ ‎-When is it?‎ ‎3、小组活动，根据所了解的同伴信息写出几个句子。例如：How old is he /she? When is his /her birthday? Where is he/she from? He/She likes …。并让其他同学猜猜你所写的是谁。‎ ‎4、课堂练习：根据对话内容选用方框中的正确句子填空。‎ A. What school are you in ?‎ B. September 25.‎ C. When is your birthday?‎ D. Yes ,we do.‎ E. It is Lu Xun’s birthday.‎ F. No, we don’t.‎ G. Is it September 25?‎ M: Hi,Lily. (1) ‎ W: Hi,Bob.My birthday is May 5th.‎ M: (2) .‎ W: Lun Xun Middle School.‎ M: Great.Do you have a school trip?‎ W: (3) But we have a School Day.‎ M: Really? When is it?‎ W: (4) ‎ M: Why (为什么) is that ?‎ W: (5) ‎ M: Thanks.‎ W: You’re welcome.‎ ‎1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ‎ 交际英语 A． 将I栏中的节日与II栏中的日期配对。‎ ‎ I II ‎1．Labor Day (劳动节) A、March 8th ‎2．April Fool’s Day(愚人节) B、May 1st ‎3．New Year’s Day(元旦) C、July 1st ‎ ‎4．Women’s Day (妇女节) D、January 1st ‎ ‎5．Party’s birthday (党的生日) E、April 1st 初一上册Unit 8 When is your birthday?评估练习 I．词汇平台 根据首字母提示完成句中所缺单词。‎ ‎1．I don’t know her d of birth.‎ ‎2 . D is the last month of the year.‎ ‎3.F comes before (在……之前)March.‎ ‎4. Our school has a school t every year.‎ ‎5. Today is my birthday. Can you come to my birthday p ?‎ II．选择填空。‎ ‎1．Our school has Art Festival every year. A. a B. an C. the ‎2．—Happy birthday ,John! — .‎ A. Fine, thanks B. Thank you C. You are welcome ‎3．— is the girl? —She is fourteen.‎ A. How B. How much C. How old ‎4．When your mother’s birthday? A. is B. are C. does ‎5．My book are on the desk ,but books are under the chair.‎ A. Mike B. Mike’s C. Mikes’‎ ‎6．Miss Green is and aunt. A. Tom’s ,Jane B. Tom, Jane’s C. Tom’s ,Jane’s ‎7．Our School Day is November . A. twenty –one B. twentieth-one C. twenty-first ‎8．My birthday is . A.1998 October ,2nd B. October 2nd ,1998 C.1998 2nd of October ‎ ‎9．This is class ,So he doesn’t know all of his students.‎ A. their first B. a their first C .their the first ‎10．The boy is . Today is his birthday. A. nine ;nine B. nine; ninth C. ninth ;nine III．句子训练 根据汉语提示，完成句子，每空一词。（月份和日期禁用阿拉伯数字。）‎ ‎1．Gina 有一个幸福的家。 Gina has a .‎ ‎2．今天是他的第十二个生日。Today is birthday.‎ ‎3．我们在电视上看了场篮球比赛。We watch a on TV today.‎ ‎4．我们班举办了一次英语演讲比赛。‎ Our class an .‎ ‎5．五月的第二个星期天是母亲节。The Sunday in is Mother’s Day.‎ IV．阅读理解。‎ ‎（A）‎ Name: Jim Miller Date of birth: May 10‎ Age:16‎ Name: Nancy Green Date of birth: July 18‎ Age:15‎ Name: Gina Brown Date of birth: July 18‎ Age:16‎ Name: Grace Miller Date of birth: March 27‎ Age:14‎ 根据卡片内容，选择最佳答案。‎ ‎（ ）1、 have the same(相同的) birthday.‎ A. Jim and Nancy B. Nancy and Gina C. Gina and Grace ‎( )2、Jim and Grace .‎ A. are 16 years old B. have the same first name C. have the same family name ‎( )3、Form the four ID cards , we know .‎ A. Jim is the oldest(最大的) B. Nancy is the youngest(最小的) C. Jim and Grace are of the same age.‎ ‎(B)‎ From: Tina Date: November 14‎ Subject: birthday party Dear Jane,‎ Tomorrow (明天) is my birthday .Can you come to my party ?It is fun.‎ Time:18:00-20:00‎ ‎ Yours,‎ ‎ Tina Welcome Speech contest Date: November 14;2008‎ Place: School Hall(礼堂)‎ Time: 8:00-10:00 a.m.‎ 根据上面的内容，判断正（T）误（F）。‎ ‎（ ）1、Tina’s birthday is November 14.‎ ‎（ ）2、”Place” means (意思是)“地点”in Chinese.‎ ‎（ ）3、Jane can go to Tina’s party and the speech contest.‎ V．书面表达。‎ 假设今天是11月12日，你（Li Hui）准备庆祝14岁生日。请你运用所学的英语知识并加以合理的想象，写一篇短文，题目为My Birthday Party。注意：1、要交待出生日聚会的时间和地点。2、参加的人员。3、你们在聚会上举行的活动。4、词数在60词左右。‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit 8 阅读与写作 I.A、完形填空。‎ Today is June 4th. It’s 1 fine day . It is Betty’s birthday. She comes 2 and sees a new red box on her bed . She opens 3 . There is nothing but a piece of paper 4 it ! Betty takes it out and 5 :”Dear Betty. I’m your present(礼物). Come and 6 me in the front room .” Betty runs 7 front room . She finds her parents there . They look at her happily. She looks around and sees her present—a nice 8 bike . “Happy birthday. Betty .” Her parents both 9 . Betty is very happy and says :” 10 very much.”‎ ‎( ) 1. A./ B. the C. a D. an ‎( ) 2. A. to home B. home C. the home D. at home ‎( ) 3. A. box B. them C. its D .it ‎( ) 4. A. under B. behind C. on D. in ‎( ) 5. A .reading B .read C .reads D .to read ‎( ) 6 .A . look for B. look after C . look like D . look ‎( ) 7 .A. in the B. for the C. to the D. out the ‎( ) 8. .A. newer B. newest C. new D. old ‎( ) 9 .A. speak B. say C. talk D. ask ‎( ) 10. A. Thanks you B. Thanks a lot C. Thank D. Thank you B、完形填空。‎ Hello, everybody! My name is Li Guoqing. I am 1 . I was born in 1995. My birthday is 2 .That’s National Day(国庆节). I like music very much and I 3 like sports.‎ My birthday is coming .My mother wants to 4 a beautiful shirt for me .On Sunday, she takes me to a big 5 store .There are 6 shirts and they are 7 all colors. She selects a blue one .It looks cool.‎ My father gives me some CDs and a 8 .He knows what I like .I am really 9 .My parents plan to have a 10 at home this year. I love them and they love me.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. eleven B. fourteen C. sixteen ‎( ) 2. A. June 1st B. January 1st C. October 1st ‎( ) 3. A. don’t B. also C. only ‎( ) 4. A. buy B. sell C. take ‎( ) 5 .A. fruits B. shoe C. clothes ‎( ) 6. A. much B. some C. lots of ‎( ) 7. A. in B. on C. at ‎( ) 8 .A. pen B. notebook C. basketball ‎( ) 9. A. happy B. boring C. interesting ‎( ) 10. A. school day B. birthday party C. volleyball game II．阅读理解。 A Mr. George works at the school lost and found . He works very carefully . Everyday when he gets a lost thing he takes notes (记录) about it . There are pens , books , school uniforms (校服)，keys , walkmans and many other things in the lost and found . Most of them are the students’. If you lost your things , it’s easy for you to go to the lost and found for help .But you must tell Mr. George what it is, its color and the day when you can’t find it. I think Mr. George is very helpful (乐于助人), and you will be happy when you find the lost things there.‎ ‎( ) 1.Who works at the school lost and found?‎ A. Mr. Brown B. Mr. King C. Mr. George D. Mr. Green ‎( ) 2.There are things in the lost and found.‎ A. no B. many C. not D. much ‎( ) 3. Most things Mr. George takes care of are the .‎ A. boys’ B. girls’ C. teachers’ D. students’‎ ‎( ) 4. If you lost your things , you’d better go to ask .‎ A. Ben B. your teacher C. your parents D. Mr. George ‎( ) 5. If you lost your things and go to the lost and found for help, you needn’t(不必) tell Mr. George .‎ A. what it is B. its color C. the day when you lost it D. how much it is ‎ B It is Jim’s birthday today . He is five years old . He gets many nice birthday presents form his family and one of them is a big drum.‎ ‎“Who gives him the drum?” his father asks.‎ ‎“His grandfather does,” answers Jim’s mother.‎ Jim likes his drum very much. He makes a noise with it ,but his mother doesn’t say anything about it . His father is not at home . He is working in a school, so he doesn’t hear the noise.‎ But one of the neighbors (邻居) doesn’t like the noise at all. So one morning she takes a knife and goes into Jim’s room. Jim is making a noise with the drum. She says to him , “Hello , Jim . Do you know there is something very nice in your drum ? Here’s a knife . Open the drum and let’s find it.”‎ ‎( ) 1.Jim gets for his birthday present.‎ A. a drum and many other things B. only a drum C. nothing D. a nice knife ‎( ) 2.Jim’s father is .‎ A. a worker B. a teacher C. an actor D. a doctor ‎( ) 3.The neighbor doesn’t like .‎ A. Jim’s presents B. the drum C. the knife D. the noise ‎( ) 4.The neighbor tells Jim .‎ A. to look after his drum B. to put the drum away ‎ C. to make a noise with the drum D. to open the drum with the knife ‎ ‎( ) 5.Which of the following is RIGHT?‎ A. Something is wrong with Jim’s father ears. ‎ B. Jim’s grandfather makes the drum.‎ C. Jim’s mother doesn’t stop(阻止) the noise.‎ D. There is a nice present in the drum.‎ C Li Jun : Excuse me , An Dong . Is this your bag?‎ An Dong : No, it isn’t , My bag is here . You can ask that girl . I think it’s hers.‎ Li Jun : OK.‎ Li Jun : Excuse me . Is this your bag?‎ Sun Fang : Oh, yes.‎ Li Jun : Here you are.‎ Sun Fang : Thank you very much.‎ Li Jun : That’s all right . Oh , what’s your name , please?‎ Sun Fang : My name is Sun Fang.‎ Li Jun : Are you in Class Two?‎ Sun Fang : No . I’M in Class Eight . And what’s your name?‎ Li Jun : Ah ,It’s a secret . Goodbye.‎ Sun Fang : Er¬¬—Bye.‎ ‎( ) 1. This dialogue happens .‎ A. in a car B. in An Dong’s home C. at school D. at home ‎( ) 2. That bag is .‎ A. the boy’s B. Sun Fang’s C. An Dong’s D. Li Jun’ s ‎( ) 3. Sun Fang is .‎ A. a girl B. a boy C. a man D. a woman ‎( ) 4. Sun Fang in Class Two.‎ A. and Li Jun are B. and An Dong are C. is D. is not ‎( ) 5. Sun Fang .‎ A. wants to know the boy’s name B. knows the boy’s name C. is the boy’s classmate D. gets angry (生气了)‎ D Do you know why the policemen on duty are in yellow ? And why the cleaners in the street are in yellow ? First , you must know what color is easy to see. What color can you see best from far away ? Many of you may say “white “. But you are wrong . It’s yellow ! The police wear yellow coats in the street and the cleaners are in yellow on the road . The drivers can see them easily . So when you are out you’d better wear a yellow coat and cap . It’s safe to wear yellow.‎ 根据短文内容，回答下列问题。‎ ‎1. What color are policemen and cleaners in ?‎ ‎ ‎ ‎2. Why do they wear yellow coats?‎ ‎ ‎ ‎3. Is it safe to wear red in the street?‎ ‎ ‎ ‎4. Who can see the cleaners easily on the road?‎ ‎ ‎ ‎5. What should children wear when they cross the road?‎ ‎ ‎ E There is a poor man . He has an orange tree . On the tree , there are many fine oranges. One of them is very, very big. It is as big as a football. Nobody sees so big an orange. The poor man is very pleased(高兴). He takes it to the King. The King is so pleased that he gives the man a lot of money for it.‎ When a rich man hears of it , he says to himself , “It’s only an orange. Why does the King give so much money for it ? I’ll take my gold (金的) cup to the King. He’ll give me more money.”‎ The next day when the King receives the gold cup , he says to the rich man ,” What a beautiful cup ! I’ll show you something wonderful(奇妙的). Please take this great orange.”‎ ‎( ) 1. How many people are there in the story?‎ A. Four B. Two C. Five D. Three ‎( ) 2. The orange is .‎ A. fine and big B. fine and beautiful C. good and fine D. big ‎( ) 3. The rich man takes his gold cup to the King for .‎ A. The orange B. a football C. money D. the orange tree ‎( ) 4. The orange is like .‎ A. a football B. a gold cup C. an egg D. beautiful color ‎( ) 5. The King receives the orange and the gold cup .‎ A. on the same day B. the next day ‎ C. every day D. on the different days F通读短文，并根据所给的首字母完成短文，使短文通顺、合理。‎ December 21st is Becky’s fourteenth b this year . When she gets home after s , she sees her parents in the living room. They say to her, “H birthday, dear! We have a present(礼物) for you , Becky. Go and look for it in your bedroom.”‎ Becky r quickly to her room. On her bed she sees a bright red box . She thinks that her p must be in the box. She opens it. There is nothing but a card in it . The girl takes it out (拿出来) and reads(读) :‎ ‎“Dear Becky , I’m your present .My first three letters (字母) are the same as in the word ‘ come ’.My last two letters are the same as in the word ‘water’. My middle 3 letters are in the word ‘put ‘. What am I?”‎ 书面表达。‎ 假设你是王东，根据以下信息写一段关于自己的短文。‎ name Wang Dong age twelve birthday July 15th father teacher mother worker Class Class 2, Grade 1‎ good friends Han Mei and Liu Ying Unit 9：Do you want to go to a movie? ‎ 导学案 课型：新授 ‎ 教师寄语：同学们，你们喜欢看电影吗？你们喜欢看什么类型的电影呢？是喜剧片（comedy）、恐怖片(thriller)还是动作片(action movie)？其实看电影也可以学到英语知识哟。多看看电影下面的英语字幕就可以学到很多单词的。让我们在电影的大千世界里来领略英语的魅力吧！ Section A 课前预习 I、预习目标1. 初步理解1b和2a对话大意。2. 理解记忆新词和短语。3. 感知、理解want的一般现在时的用法: want 的一般现在时的疑问句，及其肯定、否定回答。‎ II、预习过程 一、阅读对话，在文中划出下列新词和词组，并试着朗读几遍。将不会的圈起来，注出音标和词义。1. go 2. go to a movie 3. action 4. comedy 5. kind 6. documentary 7. thriller 8. scary 二、阅读对话、短文，在文中找出下列单词、短语，朗读两遍然后默写。‎ ‎1. 去_____ 2. 寻找，查找_____3. 种类______ 4. 喜剧_________5. 记录片____________‎ ‎ 6. 恐怖电影_______ 7. 可怕的___________ 8. 学生_________ 9. 某人______‎ ‎ 10. 去看电影______ 11. 动作片______________12. 京剧_______________________‎ 三、读对话，完成下列相关问题。1. 读Section A,1b对话，回答下列问题：Does the girl want to go to a comedy? 2. 读Section A,2a对话，判断下列句子正（T）误（F）。‎ ‎ （ ）1. Sally doesn’t like action movies. ( ) 2. Ben likes thrillers. ‎ 四、语言点导学导练 ★【知识呈现】★‎ ‎1. Do you want to go to a movie? 去看电影有多种说法,请看下面: ○1 go to a movie；○2 go to the movies；○3go to see a movie；○4 go to see a film；○5go to the cinema。‎ ‎2. 初中阶段要学习的“四看”: ○1see指看的结果,后直接跟宾语。也可用来表示看电影: see a film ○2look 指看的动作,后面若跟某人或某物,则要加介词at。看黑板或看书: look at the blackboard/your books ○3read是读的意思，一般用来表示读书：read a book/read books ○4watch 指观看、注视，主要用于看电视或比赛。 watch TV/watch…on TV ‎3. want的用法如下: ○1want to do sth.：“想去做某事”○2 want sth.：“想要某物” ○3want sb. to do sth.：“想让某人做某事”例如：I want an orange. I want to buy a bike.‎ ‎4. I like thrillers and I like action movies. Maria likes thrillers but she doesn’t like comedies. 连词and, but：and与but都可作连词,可连接两个并列的词、短语或简单句。and“和,又,而且”表示并列、承接或递进关系。but“而,但是”表示转折关系。‎ ‎★【热身练习】★ 一、找出划线部分发音不同于其他三个的选项 ‎（ ）1.A. comedy B. documentary C. movie D. opera ‎（ ）2.A. like B. five C. kind D. thriller ‎ ‎（ ）3.A. don’t B. who C. also D. go ‎（ ）4.A. funny B. sun C. student D. rush ‎（ ）5.A. too B. school C. room D. book Unit 9 Section A ‎ 课堂学习（I）（1a-2c）‎ I、学习目标1. 会用本课所学的四会单词、短语。2. 了解可数名词单数及复数形式。3. 学会谈论自己的爱好；学会询问他人的爱好4. 学会用英语做计划。‎ II、课堂学习过程 一。交流检查：大卡片检查单词短语记忆情况 movie, comedy, kind, documentary, thriller, scary, singular, plural, go to a movie, action movie 二、自主学习 1. complete 1a by oneself. 2. listen twice and complete 1b. ‎ ‎ 3. repeat 1b and then practice in pairs. 4. 1c: make your own conversations. ‎ ‎ 5. listen and complete 2a, then listen again and complete 2b. ‎ ‎ 6. Listen to2a and 2b , then fill in the blanks in the dialogue:‎ ‎ A:Do you _______ to go to a _____ ______? B:No, I don,t ______action movies .‎ ‎ A:What _____ _______ movie do you like?‎ ‎ B:I like documentaries. ________ kind of ________ do you like?‎ ‎ A: I like documentaries, too, and _________ . I _________ like thrillers.‎ ‎ B:You don’t? A:No, They are ____________.‎ ‎ 7.Listen and repeat 2b and read aloud in pairs. 8. 2c: pairwork 三、交流展示：Discuss language difficulties in group to help each other. 在小组内进行互动学习的时候，同学之间要互相帮助，如遇问题可以询问同学。不懂的地方可以询问老师。‎ 四、训练巩固 (一) 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. They are _________.A. comedy B. comedys C. comedies D. comedes ‎( ) 2. --- Do you want to go to a movie? ---- __________‎ ‎ A. Yes, I want. B. No, I am not. C. Yes, I do. D. No, I haven’t ‎( )3. Jack wants _______ the park(公园) . A. go to B. to go C. to go to D. goes to ‎( )4. Which is right(正确)?A. I like action movies and like comedies. B. I like action movie and comedies.C. I like action movies and comedy. D. I like action movies and comedies.‎ ‎( ) 5. --- _____ kind of movies do you like? --- Action movies.‎ ‎ A. What B. Who C. How D. When（　　）６. I think the book ______ boring. A. is B. be C. are D. does ‎( ) 7. I like to _____ movies. She likes to ______TV.‎ ‎ A. see, watch B. see, look C. watch, see D. watch, watch ‎( ) 8. My brother wants ______a movie actor. A. is B. be C. to be D. to is ‎（二）翻译句子1. 你想去看电影吗？2. 我不喜欢动作片。 3. 你喜欢什么类型的电影？‎ ‎4. 一些年轻人不喜欢京剧。 Some young __________ _________ ___________ Beijing Opera.‎ 五、拓展延伸： 从Ⅱ栏中找出与Ⅰ栏相应的答语 ‎ Ⅰ Ⅱ ‎( ) 1.Do you want to go to a movie? A. Yes, it is.‎ ‎( ) 2.Does she want to see a comedy? B. No, he doesn’t.‎ ‎( ) 3.What kind of movie does he like? C. Thrillers.‎ ‎( ) 4.Does Robert like action movies? D. Jackie Chan.‎ ‎( ) 5.What do you think of Mr. Bean? E. Yes, I do.‎ ‎( ) 6.Do you like thrillers or comedies? F. He likes comedies. ‎ ‎( ) 7.Who is your favorite movie star? G. Yes, she does.‎ ‎( ) 8.Is the play very exciting? H. It’s very funny.‎ Unit 9 Section A 课堂学习（II）（3a-4）‎ I、学习目标 1. 会用本课所学的四会单词、短语。2. 了解可数名词单数及复数形式。3. 学会谈论自己的爱好；学会询问他人的爱好4. 学会用英语做计划。‎ II、课堂学习过程 ‎ 一、复习检查 1. 限时默写单词、短语。（课前）2. recite the conversations in pairs.‎ ‎ 二、自主学习 1. 3a: fill in the blanks with and or but after models. ‎ ‎2. repeat and practice the sentences in 3a. ‎ ‎3. 3b: take turns to talk about the people in the picture above ‎ ‎ 4. make a survey and report it to the class.‎ ‎ 三、交流展示：Discuss language difficulties in group to help each other. 在小组内进行互动学习的时候，同学之间要互相帮助，如遇问题可以询问同学。不懂的地方可以询问老师。‎ 四、训练巩固 ‎1. go(第三人称单数形式)________2. too(近义词)_________ 3. comedy(复数形式) ‎ ‎4. fun(形容词) 5. act(名词) 6. nine(序数词) 7. movie(复数形式) ‎ ‎8. party(复数) 9. China(形容词) 10.different(反义词) ‎ ‎( ) 11. My brother likes action movies ______ he doesn’t like documentaries.‎ ‎ A. and B. but C. or D. so ‎ ( ) 12. On weekends, I often go to movies _____ my friends.‎ ‎ A. for B. with C. at D. of ‎( ) 13. Bob and his sister _______ volleyball. A. are B. likes C. like D. plays ‎( ) 14. Let’s look at pictures _______ Beijing Opera. A. for B. of C. in D. at ‎( ) 15. Jack often _______ seven classes every day. A. have B. do C. has D. does ‎( ) 16.Tom’s uncle with his son often _______ sports.‎ ‎ A. plays B. play C. playing D. to play ‎( ) 17. He often goes to _____ basket games _____ the weekend.‎ ‎ A. see, on B. look, on C. watch, at D. look, at ‎( ) 18. Our house is quite small _____ it’s very clean. A. but B. and C. so D. or ‎19．My birthday is in August. （就划线部分提问） ‎ ‎20. I like action movies. (对画线部分提问) ‎ ‎21. I often go to movies on weekends. (对画线部分提问) ‎ ‎22. He wants to go to see Beijing Opera. (该为一般疑问句) ‎ 五、拓展延伸 判断正(T)、误(F)。‎ ‎ likes why doesn’t like why Brad action movies,‎ thrillers exciting comedies, ‎ romances boring Sally action movies funny thrillers scary Michael comedies, romances great action movies boring Jane romances good thrillers sad ‎( ) 23.Brad doesn’t like romances.‎ ‎( ) 24.Sally thinks comedies are funny.‎ ‎( ) 25.Brad thinks comedies are boring.‎ ‎( ) 26.Sally and Jane don’t like thrillers.‎ ‎( ) 27.Michael likes comedies and action movies.‎ Unit 9 Section B 课前预习 I、预习目标1. 初步理解2a对话和2c、3a中短文 2. 理解记忆新词和短语，熟练掌握一些形容词。3. 学会谈论喜好和制定计划。‎ II、预习过程 一、阅读2a对话和2c、3a部分短文，在文中划出下列新词或词组，并试着朗读2遍，将不会的圈起来，注出音标和词义。1. funny 2. exciting 3. really 4. often 5. think 6. learn 7. about 8. history 9. with 10. favorite 11. actor 12. new 13. successful 14. weekend 15. too 二、阅读对话、短文后，朗读新词。然后默写下列单词。‎ ‎1. 动作片_______2. 可怕的_____ 3. 好玩的_______ 4. 悲伤的____ 5. 令人激动的______‎ ‎6. 有趣味的_________ 7. 事实上__________ 8. 常常__________ 9. 认为___________ ‎ ‎10. 学会____11. 关于____12. 历史_____13. 与……在一起____14. 最喜爱的___________‎ ‎15. 新的___ 16. 周末_________ 17. 成功的___________18. 也，又，太_______________‎ 三、读短文，完成下列问题 1. 读2c短文，回答问题 Does June like thrillers? ___________________________ 2.读3 a短文，回答问题 When does Mike often go to see Beijing Opera?_____________________________‎ 四、导学导练 ★【知识呈现】★‎ ‎1. 英语中的否定转移： 当人们在表达自己的看法或想法时，常用I think…，它的否定形式为I don’t think…，它表示对后面的句子的否定而不是否定think I think he is a good student.我认为他是一个好学生.‎ I don’t think he is a good student..我认为他不是一个好学生.‎ ‎2. with sb.意为“和某人一起”.with短语可放在句末;也可以放在主语后面,谓语动词要与主语保持一致. She with her friends often goes to the movies on weekends（at the weekend）.‎ 周末,她经常和朋友们一起去看电影.‎ ‎3. 形容词的用法 （1）形容词常放于系动词后做表语，还可与feel, look等感官动词连用做表语。例如：I am happy today. 今天我很高兴。 She feels sad now. 她现在很伤心。‎ ‎（2）形容词可放于名词前做定语，修饰后面的名词。其前也可用副词very 来修饰以加强语气。例： Tom is a tall boy. 汤姆是一个高个子的男孩。Sally is very clever. 萨莉非常聪明。 ‎ ‎【热身练习】‎ A. 按要求写单词 1.act(表示人的名词) 2.two(同音词) 3.young(反义词) 4.plural(反义词) 5.go(反义词) 6.birth(组成一个合成词) 7.work(同义词) 8.can not(缩略形式) 9.child(复数形式) ‎ ‎10.they(人称代词宾格) ‎ B. 补全对话 根据对话内容，在空格填入一个正确的单词。(7分)‎ A: Do you want to go to a movie, Edward? B: Yes, that _________ (11) good.‎ A: What kind of movies do you like?‎ B: Well, I like comedies because ______(12) funny. And I _______ (13) thrillers are great.‎ A: How about documentaries? B: No. Documentaries are________ (14). How about you?‎ A: I don’t like documentaries, either. ______ (15) I don’t like thrillers—they’re scary.‎ B: So what ________ (16) of movies do you like?‎ A: Well, I like action movies. B: You do?‎ A: Uh-huh. They’re exciting. And I like Beijing Opera, ____ (17). It’s very interesting. My father and I like it a lot.‎ Unit 9 Section B 课堂学习（I）（1a-2d）‎ I、学习目标 1. 会用本课所学四会单词、短语。2. 阅读理解对话、短文并能复述；能用所学词汇、句型进行情景口头表达和书面表达。3. 能够表达自己爱好某类电影的理由，根据自己的爱好制定出周末或节假日的行动计划 II、课堂学习过程　一、交流检查：大卡片检查单词短语记忆情况 funny sad exciting really often think learn about history with ‎ 二、自主学习1. complete 1 and check the answer in pairs. 2. listen twice and complete 2a. ‎ ‎3. listen again and complete 2b. 　　　4. listen to 2b and fill in the blanks in the dialogue:‎ ‎ A: Do you want ___ ____ to a movie, Edward? B: Yes, that _________ good.‎ ‎ A: ______ ______of movies do you like? ‎ ‎ B:Well, I like comedies _________ they are ________. And I think thrillers are _________.‎ ‎ A: How _______ documentaries? B:No, documentaries are __________. How about you?‎ ‎ A: I don’t like documentaries ,__________. And I don’t like thrillers----they are ____________.‎ ‎ B: ______ what kind of moves do you like ? ‎ A: Well. I like ___________ ___________ . B: You do ? ‎ A: Uh—huh. They are ___. And I like Beijing Opera, too.It’s very ____. My father and I like it a lo ‎5. listen to 2b and repeat. 6. read aloud alone, and then read again in pairs. ‎ ‎ 7. write about the movies Edward likes after the model. ‎ 三、交流展示：Discuss language difficulties in group to help each other. 。‎ 四、训练巩固 A. 根据所给单词及句子意思, 填入一个正确的单词形式。‎ ‎1. The two __are very interesting (comedy). 2. His friend’s birthday is December ____(twelve).‎ ‎3. Your sister _____a nice bag (have). 4. Her brother wants ___________ a documentary (see).‎ ‎5. Tom and Kate _________here (not be). 6. Mary ____________ thrillers (not like). ‎ ‎7. Can you (sing)? 8. That is a ___ (success) experiment(实验). Congratulations to you! ‎ ‎9. Mary has some ______ (story) to tell us. 10. Do you ______ (real) like swimming? ‎ B．句型转换。11. Ben likes comedies. (变一般问句作否定回答)‎ ‎12. I think comedies are funny. (变否定句)‎ ‎13. I want to go to a movie. (变一般疑问句) ‎ ‎14. I like action movies. (对画线部分提问) ‎ ‎15. She likes documentaries. (对画线部分提问) ‎ 五、拓展延伸 完形填空，用你的智慧将下面的文章补充完整，千万要细心哦！‎ Ann: Hey, Rose! Let’s 16 a movie. Rose: Hm, I don’t know…‎ Ann: Well… let’s go to see The Edge. It’s 17 thriller.‎ Rose: Un, well, I 18 like thrillers. I don’t want to go, but 19 .‎ Ann: Ok. Where’s James? 20 he want to go? Rose: I don’t 21 .‎ Ann: Hi, James. 22 you want to go to a movie? It’s The Edge.‎ James: Is 23 a comedy? I like comedies 24 action movies.‎ Ann: 25 , it’s a thriller. James: No, thank you. Let’s go to an action movie.‎ ‎16. A. go to　B. go on C. to go to　D. to go　17. A. a B. an C. the D. to go ‎18. A. not B. don’t C. doesn’t D. am not　19. A. thanks　B. thanks youC. thank yourD. thank ‎20. A. Is B. Are C. Does D. Those　　　　21. A. no B. not C. now D. know ‎22. A. Is B. Are C. Do D. Does　　　　23. A. it B. its C. it’s D. it is ‎24. A. but B. or C. and D. for　　　　　25. A. Not　B. Doesn’t　C. No D. Don’t Unit 9 Section B 课堂学习（II）（3a-4）‎ I、学习目标 1. 会用本课所学四会单词、短语。2. 阅读理解对话、短文并能复述，能用所学词汇、句型进行情景口头表达和书面表达。3. 能够表达自己爱好某类电影的理由，根据自己的爱好制定出周末或节假日的行动计划 II、课堂学习过程 一、复习检查 1. 限时默写单词、短语。（课前）2. Recite the passage.‎ 二、自主学习 1. 3a: read the article and underline the description words. repeat the article and then read twice aloud. 2. complete the movie review after the example. 3. repeat the example, then read the completed movie review aloud alone. ‎ 三、交流展示：Discuss language difficulties in group to help each other. 在小组内进行互动学习的时候，同学之间要互相帮助，如遇问题可以询问同学。不懂的地方可以询问老师。‎ 四、训练巩固 A. 英汉互1.我最喜欢的演员______ 2.看电影 __________________‎ ‎3.一部新电影____________________ 4.我父亲的生日____________________________‎ ‎5.一部成功的喜剧________________ 6.一件有趣的事情__________________________‎ ‎7.看京剧____________8.在周末__________________9.中国历史__________________‎ ‎10. with my friend 11. look at the picture 12. what kind of movies ‎ B.根据句子意思及汉语或首字母提示完成单词。 ‎ ‎13. My daughter and son are ____________(学生) in No. 1 Middle School Heze.‎ ‎14. We don’t have classes on w_______________.‎ ‎15. I think someone in Class Five _________(找到) his shoes.‎ ‎16. Her f__________ fruit is apples and bananas.‎ ‎17. 你认为《憨豆先生》是一部成功的喜剧片吗？ Do you ____ Mr. Bean is a ______comedy?‎ 五、拓展延伸 仔细观察下面表格，然后完成选择。 ‎ ‎ comedies Action movies documentaries thrillers Ben J J L L Sally J L J L Peter J J L J Jim L J L J ‎( ) 1. _____ likes comedies and documentaries. A. Ben B. Sally C. Peter D. Jim ‎( ) 2. _____ likes action movies. A. Ben B. Peter C. Jim D. A, B and C ‎( ) 3. Ben likes _____, but he doesn’t like _____.‎ ‎ A. comedies and action movies; documentaries B. comedies; thrillers ‎ C. thrillers; documentaries D. action movies and comedies; thrillers and documentaries ‎( ) 4. Peter and Jim don’t like _____. A. comedies B. action movies C. documentaries D. thrillers ‎( ) 5. Ben and Sally like _______, but they don’t like ______.‎ ‎ A. documentaries; comedies B. comedies; action movies ‎ C. comedies; thrillers D. action movies; documentaries Unit 9语言知识综合训练和运用 一、单词拼写。根据所给汉语或首字母写出各单词的正确形式，每空只填一词 ‎1. Cheng Long and Li Lianjie are great__________.（演员）‎ ‎2. I think Bill Gates is a very___________（成功的）businessman (商人)‎ ‎3. I like volleyball games; Jack likes them, _____.（也）‎ ‎4. There are many___________（学生）in the classroom.‎ ‎5. David________（学会）a lot about Chinese history. 6. Comedies are funny, but thrillers are s .‎ ‎7. The movie Harry Porter is very i _____. 8. My f movie is Titanic.‎ ‎9. Do you want to go to m ? 10. —I want to be a Beijing Opera actor. —R ?‎ 二、单项选择 ‎(　 ) 11. Bill go to an action movie. ‎ A. want to B. wants to C. want D. don't ‎(　 ) 12. I like the movie Hero(英雄) directed by (由…导演)Zhang Yimou. It's ________.‎ ‎ A. a comedy B. a documentary C. an action movie D. a thriller ‎(　 )13. My parents I all like Jackie Chen, and is a successful actor.‎ ‎ A. and; he B. and; she C. but; his D. but; he ‎( 　) 14. —How much these shoes? — 50 dollars.‎ ‎ A. are; lt's B. is; lt's C .are; Are D. are; They're ‎ ‎( 　) 15. l am a student in Class One. My brother is a student, . ‎ A. and B. but C. also D. too ‎(　 ) 16. June doesn't like because they are .‎ A. thrillers; boring B. action movies; scary ‎ C. thrillers; scary D. comedies; funny ‎(　 ) 17. My grandmother likes . She always watches on TV.‎ ‎ A. Beijing opera; it B. Beijing Opera; them ‎ C. cartoons; it D. Beijing Opera; it ‎(　 ) 18. — do you spell it in English? —J-O-H-N-S-O-N, Johnson.‎ A. Can B. How C. What D. When ‎(　 ) 19. Kate is American, her friend, Liu Li, is Chinese. ‎ A. and B. but C. or D. so ‎( ) 20.Mr Bean is _______comedy.‎ ‎ A. very a funny B. a funny very C. a very funny D. an funny very ‎( ) 21.What_______of sports do you like? A. kind B. / C. many D. much ‎( ) 22. I often go to a movie ________weekends ________my friends.‎ ‎ A. at, and B. on, and C. on, with D. in, with ‎( ) 23. I _____ think _____ interesting.‎ ‎ A. don’t, it’s not B. don’t, it’s C. think, it’s not D. /, it’s not ‎( ) 24. What kind of movies ______ Lucy ______?‎ ‎ A. does, like B. is, like C. does, likes D. do, like ‎( ) 25.Let’s go to see Beijing Opera. _________.‎ ‎ A. Yes, I do B. You’re welcome C. That sounds boring D. No, I’m not ‎( ) 26. I can learn ______ about English. A. a lot B. a lots of C. many D. a lot of ‎ ( ) 27. Ken Johnson is _______ great actor and Shaolin Temple is _______ action movie.‎ ‎ A. an; an B. an; a C. a; an D. a; a 三、找亲戚，从B栏中找出与A栏相对应的答案。‎ ‎ A B ‎（ ）1. Does he want to go to a movie? A. Her birthday is October 15th ‎（ ）2. What kind of movies do you like? B. No, that sounds boring.‎ ‎（ ）3. When is Lei La’s birthday? C. Thrillers ‎（ ）4. What is Kevin Johnson? D. My friends.‎ ‎（ ）5. What kinds of shows are scary? E. No, he doesn’t.‎ ‎（ ）6. Where’s my backpack? F. It’s under the bed.‎ ‎（ ）7. How much is the green shirt? G. It’s exciting.‎ ‎（ ）8. Let’s watch TV. H. He is a great actor.‎ ‎（ ）9. What do you think of speed? I. It’s ten dollars. ‎ ‎（ ）10. Who do you go to movies with? J. I like action movies and comedies.‎ 四、句型转换。 按要求改写下列句子，每空填一词。‎ ‎1. He wants to see a new movie. (改为一般疑问句，并作否定回答)‎ ‎ ________he _______to see a new movie? No, he_______.‎ ‎2. I like action movies. (对划线部分提问) ______ _____ _____ movies do you like?‎ ‎3. Tom likes eggs, bananas, and apples.（改为否定句）‎ Tom_____ ______ eggs, bananas or apples.‎ ‎4. My father often goes to see operas on weekends. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ______ _____ your father often ______to see operas?‎ ‎5. I think it's boring. (改成否定句) I _____ ______it _____boring.‎ ‎6. I like Jack Chen best of all the movie actors. My ______ ______ ______ Jack Chen.‎ ‎7. She also likes Beijing Opera. (改为同义句) She _______Beijing Opera, ________.‎ ‎8. want, a, you, movie, to, Chinese, do, see, action (连词成句)‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎9. They want to see movies. (改为同义句) They want to _______ _______ movies.‎ ‎10. Mike’s mother and father like Beijing Opera, too. Mike’s ____ ____ like Beijing Opera.‎ 五、综合运用。用方框中所给的词或短语的正确形式补全下面的对话。‎ ‎ ‎ Donna: Hi, Emma! 1 go to a movie.‎ Emma: Hmm. I 2 no idea(主意)‎ Donna: Well, It's an 3 ——Crouching Tiger and Hidden Dragon. ‎ Emma: Oh, I___4_______ don't like action movies. Anyway ( 不管怎样)__5_____.‎ Donna: OK. Where's Jim? __6____he want to go to a movie?‎ Emma: __7____, I don't know. Look, he is there!‎ Donna: Hey, Jim！Do you want to go to a movie? It's Crouching Tiger and Hidden Dragon!‎ Jim: Movie? That __8____ great! Is it a comedy? I like comedies and ___9_____.‎ Donna: No, it's an action movie. ‎ Jim: Oh, I think it is __10_____. Let's go to see a comedy.‎ Unit9同步阅读和写作 I．完形填空 ‎ June 1 action movies and she often goes 2 Chinese action movies. She thinks they are very 3 . She ‎ thinks documentaries are boring, 4 she doesn’t like 5 . She thinks they are scary. She 6 likes Beijing Opera. Some 7 don’t like it, but she thinks it very 8 . She thinks she can 9 Chinese history. She with her friends 10 to see Beijing Opera.‎ ‎( ) 1. A. really like B. like really C. really likes D. likes really ‎( ) 2. A. seeing B. to see C. see D. sees ‎( ) 3. A. exciting B. boring C. difficult D. sad ‎( ) 4. A. but B. so C. or D. and ‎( ) 5. A. comedies B. thrillers C. action movies D. documentaries ‎( ) 6. A. too B. either C. also D. often ‎( ) 7. A. people B. peoples C. English D. Chinese ‎( ) 8. A. interesting B. boring C. scary D. exciting ‎( ) 9. A. thinks of B. think of C. learns about D. learn about ‎( ) 10. A. has B. go C. wants D. find II完形填空 I have a good friend. 11 name is Peter. We study in Goucun Junior Middle School. We are in the same (同一个) class. He sits in front of 12 . His favorite lesson is Music. He 13 many CDs. He likes 14 music very much. He likes playing football, too. After school we often play football in the 15 . He is very helpful. We often help each 16 .‎ Peter is not a Chinese. He is from 17 . He comes to Chengwu 18 his family. His father is a doctor and his mother is a nurse. They work from Monday 19 Friday. At weekends, his mother likes shopping and his father likes fishing. Sometimes they go to the park. They all like Chinese food. They 20 very happy.‎ ‎( ) 11. A. He 　　 B. His C. She D. Her ‎( ) 12. A. I 　 　B. my C. mine D. me ‎ ‎( ) 13. A. have 　 B. has 　　　C. there is D. there are ‎( ) 14. A. listen 　　 B. listen to 　 C. listening 　　 D. listening to ‎( ) 15. A. classroom B. library C. playground D. bookshop ‎( ) 16. A. one 　 B. other 　C. others D. some ‎( ) 17. A. England B. Chinese 　 C. English 　 　 D. American ‎( ) 18. A. from 　 B. on 　　 C. with 　 D. for ‎( ) 19. A. in 　 B. to 　　 C. with 　 D. of ‎( ) 20. A. be 　 B. am 　　 C. is 　 D. are III、完型填空。‎ ‎ I often go to movies __21__ my friend, Mike. My __22__actor is Paul Jackson. He __23__a new movie, My Father’s Birthday. It’s __24__very funny comedy. Mike __25__ the actor Rick Smith. He__26__ likes his movie, Black September. It’s a very __27__ thriller, but I think it’s boring. One interesting thing: Mike is English, __28__he likes Beijing Opera! He often goes to see Beijing Opera __29__ weekends. Mike’s father likes it, __30_.‎ ‎( ) 21. A. and B. with C. or D. so ‎( ) 22. A. like B. favorite C. do D. likes ‎( ) 23. A. is B. have C. has D. be ‎( ) 24. A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ ‎( ) 25. A. likes B. like C. doesn’t like D. not like ‎( ) 26. A. real B. really C. don’t D. doesn’t ‎( ) 27. A. success B. succeed C. successful D. successfully ‎( ) 28. A. and B. but C. or D. so ‎( ) 29. A. in B. on C. at D. for ‎( ) 30. A. also B. too C. either D. and IV. 阅读短文，判断正（T）误（F）。‎ Mrs. Jones’ telephone number is 2562781 and the number of the city cinema (电影院) is 2562718. Because the two numbers look the same(一样), some people often make a mistake(弄错)and telephone her when they want the cinema.‎ One evening, the Jones are having supper at the table. Just then, the telephone bell rings. Mrs. Jones goes to answer the telephone. A tired（累的）man says, “Excuse me, at what time does your last movie begin?”‎ ‎“I’m sorry.” says Mrs. Jones, “But you have the wrong (错误的) number. This is not the cinema.”‎ ‎“Oh, sorry, it began twenty minutes ago(以前)? Thank you all the same. Goodbye.” Says the man.‎ Mrs. Jones is very surprised (惊讶), so she tells her husband（丈夫）the whole thing. Her husband, Mr. Jones laughs (笑) and says: “I see. The man’s wife wants to go to a movie, but he is tired. He doesn’t want to go to a movie. So he telephones the cinema. His wife hears(听见)him, but she can’t hear you. Now they stay at home this evening, and the husband is very happy and he can have a good rest(休息)at home.”‎ 根据上文内容判断正（T）误（F）。‎ ‎（ ）31. Mrs. Jones’ telephone number is the same as the number of the city cinema.‎ ‎（ ）32. People often telephone Mrs. Jones when they want the cinema.‎ ‎（ ）33. One evening when the telephone bell rings, they are having supper.‎ ‎（ ）34. The tired man wants to know when the last film begins.‎ ‎（ ）35. The husband is happy to stay at home.‎ V．阅读理解 ‎ This is a Chinese boy. His name is Wu Yonghua. He is twelve. He is in No. 8 Middle School. He’s in Class Three, Grade Two. His English teacher is Mr. Liu. His Chinese teacher is Mr. Zhu. Bob is an English boy. He’s in No. 8 Middle School, too. His English teacher is Miss Wang. His Chinese teacher is Mrs. Fang. Wu Yonghua and Bob are Number 5. They are good friends.‎ ‎( ) 36. Wu Yonghua is _____ boy. A. an American B. a Chinese C. an English D. a Japanese ‎( ) 37. How old is Wu Yonghua? _______.‎ ‎ A. He’s 10 B. He’s 11 C. She’s 12 D. He’s 12‎ ‎( ) 38. Bob is ______ boy. A. a Chinese B. an English C. an American D. a Japanese ‎( ) 39. How old is Bob? _______. A. He’s 12 B. She’s 12 C. He’s 13 D. We don’t know ‎( ) 40. Which is not right(正确)?‎ A. Mr. Zhu is Bob’s English teacher. B. Mrs. Fang is Wu Yonghua’s Chinese teacher.‎ C. Bob is Wu Yonghua’s friend D. A and B VI、阅读理解。‎ Nick is and American boy. His parents works in Chengdu. And he studies in a school in Chengdu. He doesn’t have brothers. This is his bedroom. Look! The baseball is on the table. And his computer game is on the table, too. The books are on the sofa. His shoes are under his bed. Where’s his pencil case? It’s in his backpack. ‎ 根据短文内容判断下列句子正误，正确的在括号里写T，错误的写F。‎ ‎( ) 41. Nick is in China. ( ) 42. His computer game and baseball are on the table.‎ ‎( ) 43. His books are in his backpack. 44. ( ) 44 His backpack is in his pencil case.‎ ‎( ) 45. His shoes are not under the bed.‎ VII. 阅读理解。‎ Robert is a singer. He works very long hours. He usually gets up at 16:00. He brushes his teeth and has a shower. Then he eats his breakfast. After breakfast he plays his guitar, and then he goes to work. To get to work, he takes the number 13 bus to a hotel. The bus usually takes him to work at 18:30. He works all night. People love to listen to him. He gets home at 7:00 in the morning, and he watches morning TV. He goes to bed at 8:30.‎ ‎( ) 46. Robert gets up ____________. A. at 7:00 in the morning B. at 16:00 C. at 8:30‎ ‎( ) 47. He eats breakfast ___________. A. in the morning B. in the afternoon C. at a hotel ‎( ) 48. Where does he work? A. At a hotel. B. In a school. C. At a store.‎ ‎( ) 49. Does he like music? A. No, he doesn’t. B. Yes, he does. C. Sorry, I don’t know.‎ ‎( )50. People ________ to listen to him very much(非常). A. don’t like B. doesn’t like C. like ‎ VIII、阅读理解。阅读短文，然后判断正（T）误（F）。‎ Many people like movies. At the movie theatre，usually we can see action movies, comedies, tragedies, thrillers, romances, documentaries and so on. On weekends, parents often take their children to movie theatres. How happy the children are! They are really excited. Most(大多数)children like comedies. Some boys also like action movies. They want to see them again and again(一遍又一遍). Some young men like thrillers. They think they are exciting. But some old people think thrillers are scary, and they love Beijing Opera.‎ ‎( ) 51.Many people don't like to see the movies.‎ ‎( ) 52.Children are happy to go to the movies.‎ ‎( ) 53.Usually children only see comedies.‎ ‎( ) 54.Some young people like thrillers, but some old men don't like them.‎ ‎( ) 55.Some old people think thrillers are exciting.‎ IX、根据短文内容选择正确答案。‎ David doesn’t go to school because it’s Sunday today. But he doesn’t stay at home. He is on a bus now. He wants to go to a movie.‎ An old man gets on the bus. David stands up and says to him, “Come and sit here, please.” The old man goes over and sits down. “Thanks, my little boy.” He says. The bus stop is near the movie. David says” Goodbye” to the old man and gets off the bus. The man says” Goodbye” to him with a smile.‎ ‎( ) 56.What does David want to do? He wants to go __________.‎ ‎ A. to a market B. to see a movie C. to school D. to get on a bus ‎( ) 57. Now David is ________. ‎ ‎ A. in school B. at the bus stop C. at the movie D. on a bus ‎( ) 58.David gave(给) his seat(座位) to ______.‎ ‎ A. an old man B. an old woman C. a boy D. a girl ‎( ) 59.How many brothers does David have?‎ ‎ A. One B. Two C. Sorry, I don’t know D. Three ‎( ) 60. The man says “ Goodbye” to him with a smile. (画线部分的意思)‎ ‎ A. 生气地 B. 微笑着 C. 担心地 D. 不客气 Ⅹ．阅读短文，回答问题 ‎　　 Sam likes eating fish very much. He often buys fish in the shop and takes them home. One day his wife sees the fish and thinks, “Good! Now, I can ask my friends to have lunch and we can eat the fish. They like fish very much. ”‎ ‎　　 When Sam comes home from work in the evening, the fish is not there and his wife says, “Oh, your cat eats it. ”And then she gives him some bread for his supper. Sam is angry（生气）. He takes the cat and his wife to a shop near his house and weighs（称）the cat. Then he turns to his wife and says, “My fish weighs one kilo. The cat weighs one kilo, too. My cat is here, you see, then, where is my fish? ”‎ ‎61．What does Sam like eating very much?‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________________________‎ ‎62．Who eat the fish that day?‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________________________‎ ‎63．How much does the fish weigh?‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________________________‎ ‎64．What does Sam’s wife give him for supper?‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________________________‎ ‎65．Can you guess if （是否）Sam knows where the fish is?‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________________________‎ XI. 短文填空 根据短文内容和首字母提示，填入所缺单词 Jim is an English boy. He comes to China w____66_____ his father and mother. They come here to work. Jim comes here to l___67______ Chinese. He is in No. 1 Middle School. He gets up early every day. He isn’t late for school. He ‎ studies hard(学习刻苦). He can read and write English well. He often h___68____ us with our English, and we often help him with his Chinese. After c 69 , he likes playing volleyball. He makes many friends here. We are glad to stay with him. On w_____70_____ he often helps his mother clean the house. Sometimes(有时) he goes to a m_____71_____. His f___72______ movies are action movies. He r___73______ likes Chinese food. He likes living here. He likes u__74____very much. We all like him, t___75______.‎ XII. 展示台 ‎ ‎ 同学们，现在该你们展示写作水平的时候了。今天你们所要表达的内容是什么呢？本单元我们学习的是什么呢?“Do you want go to a movie?” 那咱们就来说说电影的话题吧。大家都有喜欢看的电影或不喜欢的电影，你有哪些喜欢和不喜欢看的电影呢？同时也请谈一谈其相应的原因。现在你们知道了本次要你们展示的内容了吧。赶快拿起你手中的笔来，写一篇50词左右的短文，介绍你所喜欢和不喜欢的电影，并说说原因 ‎ _______________________________________________________________________________ ‎ Unit10 Can you play the guitar?‎ 课型：新授课 Section A 课前预习 I.预习目标：1.理解记忆新词和短语。2.感知理解新语法。3.学会表达做什么4.了解can的用法。5.会表达自己的意愿。6.能阅读生活中的招聘广告。‎ II.预习过程：‎ 一．通过预习，你能翻译出下面的这些短语吗？。‎ ‎1）下国际象棋（ ） 2） 与….相处融洽（ ）‎ ‎ 3）说汉语 （ ） 4） 美术俱乐部 （ ）‎ ‎ 5）弹吉他 （ ） 6）在…方面帮助（ ）‎ ‎ 7）play the piano ( ) 8)speak English ( )‎ ‎ 9)join the music club( ) 10)play well ( )‎ 二．请说出下面句子的汉语意思。‎ ‎1）Can you dance? ______________________.‎ ‎2) We want to join the chess club. _____________________.‎ ‎3) What club do you want to join ? _______________________.‎ ‎4) Can you play it well ? Yes, I can . __________________________.‎ ‎5) Come and join us. __________________________.‎ 三． 根据句意，请结合Ｓection A的内容，用适当的单词填空。‎ ‎ 1）They can’t _______English. ‎ ‎2) Ｃan you ______ chess? ____ , I can’t .‎ ‎ 3) ---Can you help kids ________ swimming? ---Yes , I can.‎ ‎ 4) Tom can play the guitar but he can’t play it very _______.‎ ‎5) I want to join a swimming club because (因为) I can _______ very well.‎ 四．主要语言点导学导练。‎ ‎1. Can you play basketball ?---Yes ,I can./ No , I can’t.你能打篮球吗？是的，我能。‎ ‎ Can 是情态动词，意思是“能，会”。本身并不表示动作或状态，因而不能单独做谓语，必须和实意动词或动词的原形一起构成谓语。情态动词没有人称和数的变化。‎ ‎2. Can you help kids with swimming? 你能帮助孩子游泳吗？‎ ‎ Help sb. with sth. 译为“在某方面帮助某人”with 是介词，其后应跟名词，动名词等。‎ ‎ He can help me with my English . He can help me with playing soccer.‎ ‎3. I want to join the music club.我想加入音乐俱乐部。‎ ‎1）句中join意为“参加，加入”加入某个团体或组织，成为其中一员。例如：Tom wants to join the Army军队/Party共产党/League共青团 ‎ ‎ 2）Want to do sth. “想干某事”，后面接动词不定式。例如：I want to have my own car.‎ ‎ 拓展：want sb. to do sth. “想让某人干某事”,后面接动词不定式作宾语补足语。‎ ‎4. 用动词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎ 1．Mary _______ (like) singing. She ______(want)______(join) the music club.‎ ‎ 2. John ________(can)_______ (play)the guitar. He _______ (play) it very well.‎ ‎ 3.Do you _______（want ）to join the ______ (swim) club ?‎ Unit10 Section A ‎ 课堂学习 ( Section A 1a-----2c )‎ I.学习目标：1）会用本课所学四会单词短语 ‎ 2.阅读理解对话、能用所学词汇、句型进行情景口头表达。‎ II.课堂学习过程：‎ 一．交流检查。让学生默写本课时的重点词汇，并利用大卡片集体检测。匹配1a 内容。‎ 二．自主学习：‎ ‎1.listen to 1b and number. 2.Listen again, and repeat loudly.‎ ‎ 3. Read 1b loudly . 4.1c. make your own conversations freely. 。‎ ‎5.对2a.2b.的处理，可先让学生读2b方框中的词填空，再听录音并检查答案。学生读并对话，然后再去听1-2遍2a中的两对话，学生就会很容易圈出所听俱乐部。‎ ‎6. listen to 2a and repeat loudly. 然后留出时间让学生读并熟记听力材料2 组对话。‎ ‎7.2c , make your own conversations in groups ,and act.‎ 三．交流展示。通过学习，你对所学内容，还有哪些不太明白，请写下来，进行小组交流讨论。‎ ‎________________________________________________________________________________.‎ 四．训练巩固。‎ ‎ 1.试着连词成句。‎ ‎ 1）play, can ,the, you ,piano, dance, or _____________________________________.‎ ‎ 2) to, you, what, want , do , join ,club _______________________________________.‎ ‎ 3) can, you , play , basketball ____________________________________________.‎ ‎ 4.)know, may, your , I , name ____________________________________________.‎ ‎ 5) good, dancing , are, at, you, __________________________________________.‎ ‎2.将下列句子排序成对话。‎ ‎( ) Sorry, I don’t know. ‎ ‎( 1 ) Do you want to join a club ?‎ ‎( ) What can you do ?‎ ‎( ) You can join the soccer club. ‎ ‎( ) Yes, I do .‎ ‎( ) What club do you want to join ?‎ ‎( ) I can play soccer. ‎ ‎( ) OK . Thank you. ‎ 五．拓展延伸。‎ ‎1. Wang Qiang can play ping-pong.(改为一般疑问句，作肯定回答)‎ ‎ ________ Wang Qiang _______ ping-pong? Yes, _______ __________‎ ‎ 2. They want to join the art club. (对画线部分提问)‎ ‎________ _________ they _________ to __________ ?‎ ‎ 3. They can play baseball.( 对画线部分提问)‎ ‎________ _________ they __________ ?‎ ‎ 4. Jet can play the guitar.(改为否定句) Jet ______ ________ the guitar.‎ ‎ 5. I want to join the music club. (对画线部分提问)‎ ‎_______________________________________________________.‎ ‎ 6. Linda can sing songs.(改为一般疑问句和否定句)‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________________________.‎ Unit10 Section A ‎ 课堂学习 ( Section A 3a-----4 )‎ I.学习目标1.阅读理解对话内容，能根据情境编写对话。2.能阅读和理解招聘广告信息，学着用英语交流。‎ II.课堂学习过程：‎ 一．复习检查。1）检查词汇和短语，最好是在规定的时间内默写教师所要求的内容。‎ ‎2）检查上节学习的对话，让学生分角色朗读，或复述。‎ 二.自主学习。1）阅读3a.3b.的句子，并准确排序。结合3b提示，根据下表，请学出一段短文，告诉大家他们都在干什么？请续写。‎ Name can can’t Tom swim sing Lucy dance Play basketball Mary Play piano Play soccer ‎ Tom can swim, but he can’t sing .Lucy can _______________________________________‎ ‎_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.‎ ‎2）处理第4部分。让学生翻译该广告内容，并试着说出Are you good with kids? 及Can you help with…?的意思。讲解招聘广告的写法。‎ 三.交流展示。写出你在3a，3b和4中仍不理解的句子，组内或班内进行交流讨论。____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 四. 训练巩固。 1）把方框中的俱乐部名称填到适当的句子中。‎ ‎ music club , art club ,sports club, cooking club ,chess club ‎ ‎1. Jim plays the violin very well. He can join the ___________.‎ ‎2. Miss Jones wants to learn how to cook .She can join the ___________.‎ ‎3. Lucy draws nice pictures . She wants to join the ___________.‎ ‎4. Lin Hai likes soccer very much. He wants to join the __________.‎ ‎5. Can you play chess? You can come to our ____________.‎ 五．拓展延伸。‎ Name : Lily Age ：14 ‎ E-mail Address:‎ Lily123@yahoo.com.cn What can you do : swimming What club do you want to join ? ‎ Swimming club Tel:0591-7895643‎ ‎1. What’s her name ? ______________________________.‎ ‎2. How old is she ? _____________________________________.‎ ‎3. What club does she want to join ? __________________________________________.‎ ‎4 .What’s her telephone number ? ____________________________________.‎ Unit 10 Can you play the guitar?‎ 课型：新授 ‎ Section B 预习案 I.预习目标：1.熟练掌握情态动词Can的用法。2.学会谈论喜好与意愿。3.学会写招聘广告。‎ II.预习过程：‎ 一．通过预习，你能完成下列词汇及短语吗？请试着补充完整。‎ ‎1) ______ ________ piano 弹钢琴 2)play _________ drums 敲鼓 ‎3）our ______ _______ 我们的摇滚乐队 4）______ the _____ ______ 在音乐室 ‎5）school ________ 学校会演 6)_______ our team 加入我们的队 二.通过预习，你能翻译下面的句子吗？‎ ‎1）Can she speak English ? _______________________.‎ ‎2) Can your brother swim ? _______________________.‎ ‎3) 李明想去加入音乐俱乐部。___________________________.‎ ‎4) May I know your name ? ___________________________.‎ ‎5）我们的摇滚队想要两位好的音乐人。________________________.‎ 三. 你能完成下面的选择吗？‎ ‎( )1. Can Bill ______? A. play the chess B. play the football C. play the guitar ‎( )2. What can she do ?－She can _______Chinese kung fu. A. play B. make C. do ‎( )3. _______ club do you want to join ? A. When B. Where C. What ‎( )4. Can she ______ English ? A. speak B. say C. talk ‎( )5. Maybe he can _______ in our club. A. be B. is C. /‎ 四．主要语言点导学导练 ‎1.Can you play the guitar ?你能弹吉他吗？Play 作动词，意为“比赛，游戏，演奏，扮演”①当play和球类比赛，游戏名称连用时，其名词前不加任何冠词。Play chess. 下棋 Play cards 打牌 play baseball 打棒球 ②当play和乐器名称连用时，乐器名词前要加定冠词the.例如：play the violion 拉小提琴 play the trumpet 吹喇叭 play the piano 弹钢琴 play the drums打鼓 ‎2.Are you a musician?你是一位音乐人吗？‎ musician 名词，意为“音乐家；音乐人”其形容词为musicial. Musician 是由music后加-ian的. 拓展：有些动词的后面加“er”或“or”变成表示人的名词。drive-driver write - writer ‎3. Come and show us!来展示给我们看看吧！show 意为“给…看”‎ show sb. =show sth. to sb 例如：Show me your phonos,please.‎ 另外，show 也可作名词，意为“展示，展出”例如：There are some famous painting on show. ‎ 有些名画正在展出。‎ ‎4.根据所给提示完成句子，每空一词。‎ ‎1）你能弹钢琴吗？ ________ you ________ the piano ?‎ ‎2）我想成为一名警察。I want to _____ a __________.‎ ‎3) 你能让我看看你的新钢笔吗？ Do you _______ me your _______ ________.‎ ‎4) 汤姆能跳舞跳的很好。 Tom can _______ very __________.‎ ‎5) 我能加入英语俱乐部吗？ Can I _____ _______ _________ club ?‎ Unit10 Section B ‎ 课堂学习 ( the first period 1a-2c )‎ I.学习目标：1。熟练掌握本课所学单词短语 2.听录音，能听清对话内容，完成相应题目 ‎3.能用所学词汇、句型进行情景口头表达。‎ II.课堂学习过程：‎ 一.交流检查。复习检查本单元的单词和短语，可利用大卡片，让学生熟读并会默写他们。‎ 二.自主学习。1.根据1a的图片，进行匹配。2.1b利用句型：Can you play the piano? Yes , I can. / No , I can’t .进行问答。3.处理2a.2b. 1)听2a，圈出你听到的单词。2）熟读听力材料，并译出汉语意思。3).Listen again ,试完成2b的表格。再听一遍，补全对话内容。‎ T: I want some students _____ the school concert. ______ you sing ?‎ S: No, I ______. But I can play the ________.‎ T: What ______ you do ,Jennifer ?‎ S: I can sing ______ can play the ________.‎ T: You can! ___Jennifer. Can you play the piano ?‎ S: No,I can’t . Victor ___ play the piano.‎ T: Yeah,I can’t sing _____ dance., ________ I can play the piano .‎ 三．交流展示。结合听力材料，标出含can /can’t的句子，熟读该材料，同位之间互相提问Bill/ Jennifer / Victor分别能够做什么，请试着表述，写出自己不理解的，进行小组讨论。‎ 四．训练巩固。1）I don’t know _____ and _____ mother. (he)‎ ‎2）There are many ______ in the playhouse. (child)‎ ‎3） _______ (not speak) Chinese in class. You can ______ English. (speak)‎ ‎4） We can see two new ______ in the music club. (piano)‎ ‎5） The new student is a ______ girl, and she’s from _______. (Japan)‎ ‎6） Her brother is a good _________. He can help kids with _______. (swim)‎ ‎7） She wants to join the art club. She ______ very well. (draw)‎ 五．拓展延伸。（根据对话完成表格） Thomas: Hi, may I know your name ?---Cindy: Jones.‎ Thomas: What’s your first name ?---Cindy: Cindy.‎ Thomas: How old are you ?---Cindy: Twelve.‎ Thomas : When is your birthday.---Cindy: It’s Nov.18th.‎ Thomas: How can we contact you ?---Cindy: My e-mail address is cindyjones@163.net. My telephone number is 8555-6785.‎ Thomas: Can you swim ?---Cindy: Yes, a little. I want to be a good swimmer.‎ Thomas: Here is a card. Please fill it out.---Cindy: Thank you.‎ Name: _________________‎ Age: __________________‎ photo Birthday: ______________‎ Telephone number:________‎ E-mail address:‎ ‎_______________________‎ What can you do ?‎ ‎_______________________________-‎ Why do you want to join the club? ______________________________‎ Unit10 Section B ‎ 课堂学习 ( the second period 3a-4 )‎ I.学习目标：1）阅读理解对话内容，能根据情境编写对话。2）能阅读和理解招聘广告信息，学着用英语交流。‎ II.学习过程：‎ 一.复习检查。检查上节的听力材料背诵。‎ 二.自主学习。1）通读3a,掌握其大意，并标出这则广告中人们需要为学校音乐节做的事情。2）3b.用给出的词填写海报。3）阅读P64 part3文章，请试着填写卡片信息。然后朗读对话。‎ 三．交流展示。根据3a,3b的内容，试着写一则招聘广告。然后小组交流，班内展示。‎ ‎ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 四．训练巩固。1.选择题。1) Do Japanese like playing basketball ?--_________________.‎ ‎ A. Yes ,he does B. No, they aren’t C. Yes, they do D. No, they can’t.‎ ‎2) Can John play the _________ ?A. piano B. basketball C. chess D. football ‎ ‎3) We want three good _____our rock club ? A. music for B. musician in C. musicians for ‎4) Tom wants ______ you .A. to tell B. tells C. to talk D. talks ‎ ‎5) Please call me ______ 0531-8878123.A. in B. at C. with D. about ‎ ‎2.根据要求完成句子。The girl in red can dance well. (改为一般疑问句， 并作否定回答)‎ ‎_______ the girl in red _______ well? NO, _____ ______.‎ ‎1） It’s Sunday today.（就划线部分提问）‎ ‎_____ _______ is it today ?‎ ‎2） They think they can help us play sports. (改写句子， 句意不变)‎ They think they can ______ us ______ sports.‎ ‎3） My sister can join the music club. （就划线部分提问）‎ ‎______ ______ your sister ______?‎ ‎4） She can see some nice pictures on the wall.（就划线部分提问）‎ ‎_____ ______ she _____ on the wall ?‎ ‎5） We want two good musicians for our school concert. （就划线部分提问）‎ ‎______ ______ good musicians _____ you ______ for your school concert ?‎ 五.训练及拓展 本单元要求学生能够表达自己在某一方面所具备的才能，谈论自己的喜好与意思，会写招聘广告。校学生会将在艺术节期间组织一场学生的文艺表演，欢迎有这方面特长的同学踊跃报名，请你代表学生会的文体部，写一个招聘海报。‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.‎ Unit10单元语言知识综合训练(selfcheck)‎ 一、单项选择题(每题1.5分，共15分) ‎ ‎ ( )1. Can Bill ________?‎ A. play the chess B. play the football C. play the guitar ‎( )2. －What can she do ?－She can _______Chinese kung fu.‎ A. play B. make C. do ‎( )3. _______ club do you want to join ? A. When B. Where C. What ‎( )4. Can she ______ English ? A. speak B. say C. talk ‎( )5. Maybe he can _______ in our club. A. be B. is C. /‎ ‎( )6. Mary can play the trumpet ______ she can’t swim . A. and B. but C. or ‎( )7.－Can he play tennis ______ volleyball? －He can play tennis.‎ A. and B. or C. but ‎( )8. Sorry, I can’t play basketball ______.A. good B. nice C. well ‎( )9. Tom often helps kids ______ dancing. A. with B. to C. on ‎( )10. Come and show _____. A. I B. he C. us ‎ 二、 请翻译以下词组(每题2分，共20分)‎ ‎1. 弹吉他_______________ 2.加入音乐俱乐部 ______________‎ ‎3. 下象棋_______________ 4.和孩子们相处的好_____________‎ ‎5. 说英语_______________ 6.加入游泳俱乐部 ______________‎ ‎7. 打鼓_________________ 8.帮助孩子们学游泳_____________‎ ‎9. 唱得好______________ 10.学校音乐艺术节_______________‎ 三、用所给动词的适当形式填空。(每题1分，共5分)‎ ‎1. May I ____________ (know) your name?‎ ‎2. The twins can ___________ (paint).‎ ‎3. They want ____________ (see) a film.‎ ‎4. She _____________ (not have) a dictionary.‎ ‎5. I can help you ____________ (learn) English.‎ 四、句型转换(每题2分，共20分)‎ ‎1.I can play the guitar.(变一般疑问句) _____ ______ play the guitar ?‎ ‎2.I want to join the chess club.（对画线部分提问）______ club ______ you want to join ?‎ ‎3.He can paint.(对画线部分提问) ______ _______ he ________?‎ ‎4.Can your father play the piano ?（作否定回答） No, he ________.‎ ‎5.I think Lily is in her school.(改为否定句)I ____ _____ Lily _____ in her school.‎ ‎6．He can play volleyball。（否定句）________________________________________‎ ‎7．The twins can play the piano。（一般疑问句,并作两种回答）‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________________________‎ ‎8．I can do housework。（画线提问）‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎9．Anna wants to join the music club。(画线提问)‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎10．What’s your name, please?(同义句) ‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________‎ 五、改错(每题1分，共5分)‎ ‎( )__________1. She can speaks English ‎ ‎ A B C D ‎ ‎( )__________2. I’m fifteen year old.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎( )__________3. She likes comedys and thrillers.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎( )__________4. Can you play guitar?‎ ‎ A B C D ‎ ‎( )__________5. I want join the art club.‎ ‎ A B C D 六．请将正确答语的序号填到左边的括号中(每题2分，共10分)‎ ‎( )1.Can you help the kids with computers ? ‎ ‎ ( )2.What club do you want to join ? ‎ ‎ ( )3.Do you want to join the chess club? ‎ ‎ ( )4.What can she do ? ‎ ‎ ( )5.Are you an actor ? ‎ ‎ A. Yes, I do. B. No, I can’t.‎ C. She can swim. D. No, I’m not. E. The basketball club.‎ 七、翻译句子。(每题2分，共10分)‎ ‎1．你想参加什么俱乐部？__________________________________________________‎ ‎2．汤姆会弹吉他，但是弹得不是很好。______________________________________‎ ‎3．来给我们展示你的才能吧。______________________________________________‎ ‎4．他们会打鼓。__________________________________________________________‎ ‎5．你和孩子们相处得好吗？______________________________‎ 八、根据句意和首字母完成单词。(每题1.5分，共15分)‎ ‎1.We want two good m___________ for our rock band.‎ ‎2.She can speak English, but only a l__________.‎ ‎3.W_______do you want to join the club?‎ ‎4.What’s your a___________ ? I live in Yimeng Road.‎ ‎5.I can’t help you w_________ your English today.‎ ‎6.My sister plays the g___________ very well.‎ ‎7.I can do C____________ kung fu.‎ ‎8.After I get up at 6:00am, I eat b_____________.‎ ‎9.Tom can swim well. He wants to join the s____________ club. ‎ ‎10.What’s your f____________ sports?‎ Unit10 同步阅读与写作 ‎ ‎ A篇 Mr King goes to see his friend in New York. His friend works in an art club there. Mr King doesn’t know New York very well. And he can’t find his way. He see a girl at a bus stop. He walk to her and says:” Excuse me, can you tell me the way to Center Street?” ‎ ‎ The girl is friendly. She smiles, but she can’t speak English. She can speak French. She is new there, too. She takes out a small notebook from her pocket() and reads something on it. “I’m sorry. I can’t speak English.”‎ ‎( ) 1.Mr King goes to New York to ___________.‎ A. find a job B. see the girl C. work in the art club D. see his friend ‎( )2.Mr King’s friend works in _________.‎ A. an art club B. a school C. a chess club D. a bus stop ‎( )3. Mr King can’t find his way because ________.‎ ‎ A. he is new in New York B. he can’t see ‎ C. he is old D. he is tired ‎( 4. What’s “ friendly” in Chinese?‎ A. 生气的 B. 热情的 C. 冷淡的 D. 友好的 ‎( )5. Which is right?‎ A. The girl at the bus stop is an America.‎ B. The girl can help Mr King.‎ C. The girl can’t help Mr King.‎ D. The girl gives the notebook to Mr King.‎ B篇 Jim likes playing in a river. But there isn’t a river near his new house. He is not very happy.‎ One day, he asks his mother, “Is there a river near here?” “No, there isn’t ” His mother says. “But our new house has a garden.” “I don’t like it .” say Jim.‎ One morning, his mother says, “There is a beautiful park near here, Jim. And there is two pools in it. We’ll go there this afternoon.” Jim is very happy.‎ After lunch Jim and his mother go to the park. He plays in one of the pools. He has a very good time.‎ 根据短文内容判断正（T）误（F）。‎ ‎( )1. Jim likes playing in a river. ‎ ‎( )2. Jim likes playing in the garden.‎ ‎( )3. There is a river near his new house.‎ ‎( )4. There is a park near his new house.‎ ‎( )5. After lunch, Jim and his mother go to the park.‎ C篇 This is a photo of my family. This is my father. He can play the piano. He wants to join the music club. He thinks music is interesting. My mother can swim. She thinks it can make her relaxing. And she wants to join the swimming club. I want to join English club, because I’m good at English. At school my favorite subject is English.‎ 判断正误。（T or F ‎( )1. My mother is good at music.‎ ‎( )2. My father can play the trumpet.‎ ‎( )3. I think English is very interesting.‎ ‎( )4. My father thinks music is boring.‎ ‎( )5. Math is my favorite subject.‎ D篇 ‎ ‎ Do You Want To Be A Musician ?‎ Do you want to be a musician ? Come to our club , and you’ll be very happy in the club . We have lessons about the piano , the drums , the bamboo flute , the guitar and the violin for just $20 each . You can also learn to sing , to dance for $25 each . If you like art , you can be satisfied (满意), too ----It’s just for $30 each ! ‎ 判断正误（正确T 错误F）‎ ‎( ) 1. How many kinds of instruments are there in the ad ? There are ________ . ‎ A. 5 B. 6 C. 7 D. 4‎ ‎( ) 2. How much is it for piano ? It’s ________ . ‎ A. $25 B. $20 C. $30 D. $45‎ ‎( ) 3. We can’t learn about ________ in the club . ‎ A. drums B. bamboo flute C. art D. chess ‎ ‎( ) 4. If you want to learn about guitar and singing , you should pay ________ . ‎ A. $45 B. $20 C. $30 D. $25‎ ‎( ) 5. What does lesson mean in the ad ? ________ . ‎ A. 教师 B. 课本 C. 课程 D. 教室 E篇 Jim is a basketball fan (球迷). He is very good at playing basketball. Michael Jorden is his favorite (最喜欢的) basketball player. Jim is on the school basketball team. Every Friday (星期五) afternoon, they play basketball after class. Jim’s friend Mike isn’t good at basketball, but he’s very good at football. Ronaldo is his favorite football player. Mike is on the football team. They play football every Tuesday afternoon.‎ 判断正误（正确T 错误F）‎ ‎( )1. Jim likes basketball very much. ‎ ‎( )2. Michael Jorden is a football player.‎ ‎( )3. Jim plays basketball every day.‎ ‎( )4. Jim’s friend Mike is good at basketball, too. ‎ ‎( )5. Ronaldo is Jim’s favorite football player. ‎ F篇 ‎　　Many children like to go to pet shows(表演). One day, Miss Brown takes the children to a pet show. The children are glad that they can ride on the animals! Girls and boys ride on horses and goats happily. ‎ ‎　　They all like it most when they ride on an elephant. The children feed it peanuts(花生). The children like the ride, and the elephant likes the peanuts. ‎ ‎　　1. What is the topic of the story? ‎ ‎　　A. Playing on the grass. B. Riding animals at a pet show. ‎ ‎　　C. Riding in a fast car. D. Fun at the zoo. ‎ ‎　　2. The children at the pet show ride on__________ . ‎ ‎　　A. dogs B. cats C. goats D. pigs ‎ ‎　　3. The children like it most when they ride on__________ . ‎ ‎　　A. an elephant B. a horse C. a goat D. a cow ‎ ‎　　4. From the story we can know that the elephant likes to eat__________ . ‎ ‎　　A. rice B. peanuts C. apple D. ice ‎ ‎　　5. The children are very__________ . ‎ ‎　　A. hungry B. happy C. sad D. old ‎ G篇 ‎ I am Zhang Qiang. On weekends I often watch TV with my friend, Guo Peng. My favorite movie star is Baotian Lee(李保田). He is a great actor. He has a movie, Magical Doctor, Xilaile(《神医喜来乐》). It’s a very successful comedy. I think it’s great fun. Guo Peng likes Michele Yan best. He likes her famous movie, Sleepless Night. It’s a thriller. I don’t think it’s great. In fact, it’s boring. One thing is interesting. Guo Peng also likes comedies. He often tells me, “Comedies are really fun!” My father likes them, too. He even wants to be a comedy artist! ‎ 阅读短文,用正确的单词或人名填空,使其与原文相符｡ ‎ ‎　1. Zhang Qiang’s favorite__________ star is Baotian Lee. ‎ ‎　2. Zhang Qiang and Guo Peng both(两个都)like__________. ‎ ‎　3. The main(主要的)actor in Magical Doctor, Xilaile is__________ . ‎ ‎　4.__________doesn’t like Sleepless Night. ‎ ‎　5. Zhang Qiang’s father wants to be a comedy__________ .‎ H.任务型阅读 根据下表提供的信息，完成练习。‎ Name can do can’t do Bill play the drums, sing,‎ dance, swim play the piano, paint,‎ speak English well Jennifer play the piano, speak ‎ Chinese well, sing well swim, play the drums, play chess Victor paint well, play the guitar and drums, swim speak Chinese, dance or sing, play computer games ‎① 判断下列句子是否符合事实，符合的写“A”,否则写 “B”。‎ ‎1．Bill and Jennifer can sing but they can’t play the piano. ( )‎ ‎2. Jennifer can help Victor with his Chinese. ( )‎ ‎3. Bill　isn’t　good at playing the piano but Victor can play it well.‎ ‎ 4. All of them can join the music club. ( )‎ ‎ 5. If(如果) Victor wants to dance and sing, Bill can help ． （　　） ‎ ‎② 在横线上填入适当的词，使句子的意思完整并符合事实。‎ ‎1.Jennifer can't play __________but he can play the _________.‎ ‎2.Victor _______ play the computer games or _________ Chinese.‎ ‎3.Bill can’t __________ , but Victor can do it very well.‎ ‎4.Bill and Victor can play the __________.‎ ‎5.Victor and Bill can join the ________ club, but Jennifer can’t.‎ I.写作。‎ 根据下面提示写一篇60词左右的小短文。‎ ‎1、 我的朋友Cindy会唱歌、跳舞、弹钢琴，她很喜欢画画，画得很好。‎ ‎2、 但是她不会打篮球，不会下象棋，不会敲鼓。‎ ‎3、 我能帮Cindy学习敲鼓，Cindy可以帮助我画画。‎ ‎4、 我们可以互相帮助。（each other）‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________.‎ Unit 11 What time do you go to school ?.‎ 课型：新授 ‎ Section A 预习目标：一。理解本单元生词和短语。二。会询问和表达时间。三。会谈论日常作息习惯。‎ 预习过程：‎ ‎1阅读对话和短文找出下列短语，并默写：‎ ‎ 1〉去上学 2〉去上班 3〉洗澡 ‎ ‎4〉乘第17路公共汽车 5〉刷牙 6〉到达 ‎ ‎7〉在夜间 8〉起床 9〉很快，不久 ‎ ‎10〉在上午 11〉听…… 12〉写信 ‎ ‎13〉get home 14〉at eleven 15〉go to bed ‎ ‎2. 1a match the words with the pictures:‎ 知识点拨：‎ ‎1.关于时间的表达法—英语中表达重点的方法一般有两种：（1）按时间的顺序先说“时”，再说“分”。如：six thirty ,seven ten.（2）先说“分”，再说“时”，中间加上past 或to . ten past eight八点十分,half past seven七点半, a quarter to two两点差一刻, twenty to nine八点四十 ‎1.What time do you usually get up? 你通常什么时间起床？‎ ‎(1) What time 引导的特殊疑问句，用于询问时间，意为几点或什么时候。‎ 例如：What time does he often play football? 他经常什么时间踢足球?‎ ‎(2) usually 频度副词，在英语中还有sometimes ,often ,never 等。用来表示动作或状态的频率，通常用在be动词、助动词或情态动词之后，行为动词之前。‎ 例如：He is often late for class. Jim usually goes to bed at nine.‎ ‎2.I usually get up at five o`clock. 我经常5点起床。‎ 介词at 表示在具体的某个时间，几点、几分。‎ ‎3. Take a shower 固定短语，相当于have a shower .‎ 预习练习：‎ ‎1.根据句意完成句子。‎ ‎ 1.She (通常) gets up at 6:30 am.‎ ‎ 2.Jim often （洗澡）in the afternoon.‎ ‎ 3.They (到家)at 5:30 every day.‎ ‎ 4.Jerry often （上床睡觉）at 9:00.‎ ‎ 5. （几点了）？It`s eight o`clock.‎ ‎2.根据首字母提示补全单词：‎ ‎1. What t does she go to work?At eight o`clock.‎ ‎2. He eats b at seven am. ‎ ‎3. Can you think what Jim`s j is? I think he`s a teacher. ‎ ‎4. There are twenty-four h in a day. ‎ Unit 11 Section A 课堂学习 (the first period 1a-2c)‎ 一、交流检查 ： 1、组长检查预习案，老师给给予指导及解答。3、复习数字及时间表达。‎ 二、自主学习：1.listen to 1b and match 2. listen again and fill in the blanks:‎ A: What time do you usually _________, Rick ? B: Um,I _______get up at ______ o’clock..‎ A: 5 o’clock. And what time do you ________? B: Um, At _______ o’clock.‎ A: Hmm. And ____________________? B: Seven o’clock.‎ A: What time do you usually _______________ ? B: Uh, eight o’clock.‎ A: What time do you usually ________________? B: I usually go to school at _____o’clock.‎ ‎3.listen and repeat , then read loudly , and practise 1c freely in pairs.‎ ‎4.listen twice and complete 2a, 2b. 5. listento 2a, 2b again and fill in the blanks:‎ A: You have a ______ _______ , don’t you, Rick?‎ B:Yes. I have two _____________ and two ______________.‎ A: Wow! How many ___________ do you have?‎ B: We ______ have _______ a shower.‎ A: Is that ____________________?‎ B:No, _________we have a shower schedule. My brother Bob _______ a shower ______,at 5 oclock.‎ A: Wow! That’s ____________________ .‎ B: Yeah. Then mysister Mary takes a shower at _____o’clock.. ________my brother Jerry takes a shower at ________ o’clock. I take a shower at ______ o’clock, my sister Alice at _________ o’clock.‎ ‎6. listen and repeat , then read loudly , and practise 2c freely in pairs.‎ 三.课堂练习：用动词适当形式填空：1.Jim with me often ______(play)basketball after class.‎ ‎2.Rick`s family_______(take) a shower every day. 3.He ________(eat) rice for breakfast. ‎ ‎4.What time _____（do）your father eat breakfast? 5.______your brother _____(run ) in the morning ?‎ 四．句型转换:‎ ‎1 .Jim often does his homework at 4 o`clock.(一般疑问句)‎ ‎ Jim often ______his homework at 4o`clock?‎ ‎2. LinHai helps his mother with the housework on Sundays.(变否定句)‎ ‎ LinHai _____ ______mother with the housework on Sundays.‎ ‎3We eat breakfast at seven o`clock.（划线提问） do you eat breakfast ?‎ ‎4.I think Tom is at home .(否定句)。 I _______ think Tom _______at home. ‎ ‎ 五.填上适当的介词.‎ ‎1. Jim usually get _______school______8:00 in the morning. 2.We eat rice _______breakfast.‎ ‎3 People often eat dinner ______the evening. 4. What time is it________your watch? 5.Listen_________your teater carefully in class. 6. We go to school _______Monday _____Friday.‎ 六、拓展延伸。重新排列下列句子，使之成为一段完整的对话。‎ ‎1. Do you watch TV in the evening. 2. At about 6:50.‎ ‎3. Do you go to school by（乘） bus 4. What time do you have breakfast?‎ ‎5. At 6:00. 6. Yes, but not on weekdays.‎ ‎7. How（怎样） do you go to school? 8. No, I don`t.‎ ‎9. What time do you get up? 10. By bike. 正确的顺序： ‎ Unit 11 Section A ( the second period 3a-4)‎ 一. 学习目标：1.阅读理解短文. 2.记忆短语生词.. 3.会描述日常作息习惯.‎ 二.学习过程：‎ ‎(一).复习检查(英汉互译，限时3分钟）：‎ ‎1.牙齿 2.在五点起床 3.刷牙 4.去上班 5. 到家 7.弹吉它 ______ 8.早饭后 ‎ ‎9.take …to…__________ 10. 看早间新闻 _____________ 11.上床睡觉______________ ‎ ‎12.听老师讲课__________ 13. 爱，喜爱_______________ 14.告诉，讲述____________ ‎ ‎15. 给……写信___________ 16.大约在八点 _______________ ‎ ‎17.best wishes_______________17. What a funny time to have break fast ______________________ ‎ ‎（二）自主学习：‎ ‎1. Ss read 3a silently and match the pictures with the corroct clocks.‎ ‎2. Ss read 3a carefully and answer 4 questions:‎ ‎1）What time does Scott usually get up? ‎ ‎2) What does he do after breakfast? ‎ ‎3) Which bus does he take to get to work?‎ ‎4) What time does he go to bed?‎ ‎ 3.Ss read 3a loudly after the teacher, then read it aloud alone for 5 minutes.‎ ‎ 4.SS try to retell 3a according to key words. Or recite 3a.‎ ‎ 5.Practise 3b and part 4 in pairs with more new information given by the teacher.‎ 三.练习： ‎ ‎ Ⅰ.组词成句。‎ ‎1. time , is ,it, what____________________________________________________?‎ ‎2. does, get up, she , time, usually, what________________________________________?‎ ‎3. soccer, he , time, play, what, does,____________________________________________?‎ ‎4. plays, she, piano, the, eight, at, about, often, ________________________________________?‎ ‎5. school, often, at, 6:30, go, I, to,_______________________________________________?‎ II. 搭配。‎ What nine o’clock ‎ It’s at six o’clock What time does she you usually eat breakfast ‎ I usually get up time is it ‎ What time do play soccer 四．用适当的词填空，补全下面的短文：‎ ‎ I usually _______（起床）at _______. I have milk and bread for breakfast. After breakfast, I _______（洗澡）and then I _______（上学）by bus. I get to school at _______ I have five classes in the morning. And then I have lunch at ________. In the afternoon I have two classes. I _______（回家）at _______. I get home at 4:30 p.m. I _______（吃晚饭）at about _______. After dinner, I _______（做作业）. I _______（睡觉）at _______. My life is busy but not exciting.‎ Unit 11 Section B预习案 预习目标：1. 谈论自己或他人的日常作息习惯。2. 熟练掌握本部分的单词及习惯用语。‎ 一。预习过程：1阅读对话和短文找出下列短语，并默写：‎ 在上午 在下午 在晚上 ‎ 在夜里 整日整夜 了解关于……的情况 ‎ 大约 给某人写信 tell sb about sth ‎ 做作业 开始，出发 最好的 from….to ‎ 星期六 回家 我（宾格） ‎ 二．知识点拨：‎ ‎1. People usually eat dinner in the evening.人们通常在晚上吃正餐。‎ ‎ in 是介词，意为“在……期间”例如：in the morning /in the afternoon /in the evening ‎ 介词at , in , on表时间的用法区别？‎ ‎(1) at 用在时刻前，表示在几点几分，也可用来表示在正午，在夜晚。例如：at five o`clock在五点钟at noon 在中午 ‎(2) in 用在月分，季节，年份前，也可用来表示泛指“在上午，在下午，在晚上”。例如：in the evening在晚上，in January 在一月，in summer在夏天，in 2009 在2009年，‎ ‎(3) on 用在日期，星期几和节日前，也可用来表示具体某天或某天的某晌等。例如：on May 1st在五一，on Monday 在星期一，on Monday morning 在星期一上午 三．预习自测。‎ ‎（一）根据汉语完成句子 ‎1. 人们通常夜里睡觉。‎ ‎ People usually go to bed _________ __________.‎ ‎1. Jim 经常早晨跑步。‎ ‎ Jim often runs_______ ________ ________.‎ ‎2. 谢谢你的来信。 ______ _______ your letter.‎ ‎3. 你想了解我的早晨的情况吗？‎ ‎ Do you want to _______ ________ my morning ?‎ ‎4. 我大约在七点半吃早餐。‎ ‎ I ______ breakfast at ____ ________7:30 .‎ ‎6. 请尽快给我写信。 Please _______ ________ me soon.‎ ‎7.学校8点开始上课。 School ______at 8:00.‎ ‎（二）.用所给动词的正确形式填空。‎ ‎1.______(have) a seat, please, Lily.‎ ‎2.There ______ (be) many sheep on the hill.‎ ‎3.Let’s ______ (clean) the classroom.‎ ‎4.Mr Brow ______ (go) to work at six every day.‎ ‎5.He ______ (not go) to bed at 8:30.‎ ‎6.She ______ (do) her homework at 7:00 in the evening.‎ ‎7.Scott ______ (work) very long hours.‎ ‎8.What time ______ you usually ______ (get) up?‎ Unit 11 Section B （the first period 1a – 2c）‎ 一．学习目标。1. 熟练掌握本单元生词和短语。 2. 能正确快速地谈论日常作息习惯。‎ 二．学习过程。‎ ‎（一）复习检查： 检查单词短语记忆情况（限时2分钟）。‎ 在上午 在下午 在晚上 在夜里 跑 ‎ 做作业 去上学 吃午饭 吃完饭 上床 睡觉 回家 起床 通常 ‎ ‎（二） 自主学习：‎ ‎ 1.Read 1a and match ‎ ‎ 2.practise 1b in pairs ‎ ‎ 3.Listen to 2a and circle ‎ 4.Listen to 2b and write the times. ‎ ‎ 5.Listen to 2a ,2b and fill in blanks in the dialogue:‎ A:__________ for the interview, Tom. We want to _________ about your day. B:: OK.‎ A: When do you _______ ______?‎ B: When do I get up? Hmm .Usually _______ five o’clock. Then I run around six.‎ A: You ________ at six in the ________________. B: Uh-huh.‎ A: And what time do you ________ ________? ‎ B: Breakfast? Usually around seven. And then I _______ go to school _______ eight o’clock.‎ A:WOW! And you ______ ________ at …….?‎ B: Four fifteen in the ___________________ .‎ A: And what do you do in the ___________? ‎ B: I ______ my _______ around 5:30. And I ______‎ ‎ _________ at 7:15. And I ______ _______ _______ at 9 o’clock.‎ A: That’s ________________ . But then you get up early. B: Uh—huh.‎ ‎6.Read the filled dialogue loudly alone or in pairs ‎ ‎（三）拓展应用：Make dialogues according to your own real informations: ‎ ‎（四） 巩固练习:1、单词拼写：‎ ‎1). She ____(通常) gets up at 6:30 a.m.2). I often take a ___(淋浴) before I go to bed.‎ ‎3). He ______(工作) in a big factory.4). What time do you often do your __(作业)?‎ ‎5). How many ______(字母) are there in English?‎ ‎6). What are your best ________(祝愿)?‎ ‎7). Their ___ _(工作) are standing and watching at the door.‎ ‎8). My friends are coming _______(不久).‎ ‎9). He _____ (听) to the teachers carefully in class.‎ ‎10). My friend ______(写信) to me three times a month.‎ ‎2. 根据要求改写下面句子：‎ ‎1. He gets home at five in the afternoon. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ________ _______ __________ he ________ home in the afternoon?‎ ‎2. I think Tom is at home. (否定句) I ________ think Tom ______ at home.‎ ‎3. Now it’s five thirty. (同义句) Now it’s _______ ________ ______‎ Unit 11 SectionB(the second period 3a-4.)‎ 一．学习目标。1.能熟练谈论作息习惯。2.会写信。3，背诵3a.‎ 二．学习过程：‎ ‎1复习检查：.单词、短语检查：因……而感谢 了解关于……的情况 大约在六点十五 请给我写信 告诉我 ‎ 尽快回信 学校九点开始上课 最美好的祝福 ‎ 想知道关于……的情况 ‎ ‎2. 复习导入，根据所给信息，口头表达作息时间。‎ ‎3．让学生阅读3a的书信，并写出在下列时间所做的事情 ‎ ‎6:15 ，7:30 ，8:00 。‎ ‎4.再读3a的书信，回答下列问题 ‎ ‎ ①Who is the letter to? ②Who is the letter from?‎ ‎ ③ What time does school start ? ④ What time does Jane usually get up?‎ ‎ 5. Ss read 3a loudly, then try to retell to key words.‎ ‎ 6. Complete 3b . ‎ ‎7. 能力拓展： Part 4 :pairwork. ‎ ‎8. 课堂练习：I.句型转化。‎ ‎1. She has lunch at twelve. (对划线部分提问) ______ ______ does she have lunch? ‎ ‎2. What time is it now? (改为同义句) ______ the ______ now? ‎ ‎3. Jack eats breakfast at home. (改为一般疑问句) ______ Jack ______ breakfast at home? ‎ ‎4. Scoot works very long hours every day. (改为否定句)‎ Scoot ______ ______ very long hours every day. ‎ ‎5. Thanks for your letter. (改为同义句) ______ ______ for your letter. ‎ II.完成句子。‎ ‎1.你的父亲七点钟去上班吗？ ______ your father ______ ______ ______ at seven? ‎ ‎2.你通常几点去睡觉？ ______ ______ do you usually ________ ________ ________? ‎ ‎3.请仔细地听老师讲课。 Please ______ ______ the teacher carefully.‎ ‎4.现在很晚了，让我们回家吧。 It's ______ now. Let's ______ ______. ‎ ‎5.我的弟弟在下午做家庭作业。 My brother ______ ______ ______ in the afternoon. ‎ ‎6.你是什么时候到达合肥的？ When do you ______ ______ Hefei? ‎ ‎7.我经常骑自行车去上班。 I often by bike.‎ Ⅲ.阅读理解填词。‎ Meimei and Kate are good f . They go to d schools. Meimei is in No.51 Middle School. They s very hard. Meimei is g at English. Kate d well in math. Meimei l playing football. Kate`s f sport is pingpong. Both of them h . Lunch at school on w . They go home by b after school.‎ ‎1.f 2.d 3.s 4.g 5.d ‎ ‎6.l 7.f 8.h 9.w 10.b ‎ Unit 11 What time do you go to school?测试题 ‎ ‎ 一。积累与运用：(10分)（1）短语翻译：‎ ‎1. 看电视__________________________________ 2. 打鼓___________________________‎ ‎3. 上班____________________________________ 4. 吃晚饭_________________________‎ ‎5.一张卡片________________________________ 6.go to school_____________________‎ ‎7.take a shower___________________________ 8.at eleven thirty___________________‎ ‎9.early morning news________________________ 10..know about_____________________‎ ‎（2）在B栏中选择A栏的答句：‎ ‎ A B ‎( )11. Can you see it? A. We want to go this afternoon.‎ ‎( )12. How can I contact you? B. My phone number is 421-5129‎ ‎( )13. When do you want to go? C. It’s $15.‎ ‎( )14. How much is the Shirt? D. Yes, I can.‎ ‎( )15. Does she like movies? E. No, she doesn’t.‎ 二．选择填空题：‎ ‎( )1. Here are your new clothes, please __________________.‎ ‎ A. put on them B. put it on C. put them on ‎( )2. Thanks for _________________ me.‎ ‎ A. helping B. to help C. help ‎( )3. I am busy __________________ English in my room.‎ ‎ A. to read B. reading C. read ‎( )4. I want to know something _________________ your evening.‎ ‎ A. about B. on C. around ‎( )5. He ____________________ at 6:00 in the afternoon.‎ ‎ A. get home B. gets to home C. gets home ‎( )6. __________________ a good time to listen to him sing!‎ ‎ A. How B. What C. Why ‎( )7. ________________ at 7:30 in the morning.‎ ‎ A. The classes begins B. Class begin C. Class begins ‎( )8. He __________________ his homework ____________ Sundays.‎ ‎ A. doesn’t, on B. don’t do, in C. doesn’t do, on ‎( )9. It’s time ________________ school.‎ ‎ A. go to B. for C. to go ‎( )10. You must __________________ a schedule.‎ ‎ A. make B. write C. read ‎( )11. He is always the last one ___________________ to school.‎ ‎ A. to B. to get C. get ‎( )12. A: Please ________________ the word. B: S-C-H-O-O-L, school.‎ ‎ A. write B. say C. spell ‎( )13. We usually eat _______________ lunch at 12:30.‎ ‎ A. my B. the C. X ‎( )14. Mike often ________________ a shower in the morning.‎ ‎ A. makes B. have C. takes ‎( )15. Do you often watch news _______________ TV?‎ ‎ A. by B. on C. in 三. 用适当的词填空，补全下面的短文：‎ ‎ I usually _______（起床）at _______. I have milk and bread for breakfast. ‎ ‎ After breakfast, I _______（洗澡）and then I _______（上学）by bus. I get to ‎ ‎ school at _______ I have five classes in the morning. And then I have ‎ ‎ lunch at ________. In the afternoon I have two classes. I _______（回家）at ‎ ‎ _______. I get home at 4:30 p.m. I _______（吃晚饭）at about _______. After ‎ ‎ dinner, I _______（做作业）. I _______（睡觉）at _______. My life is busy but not ‎ ‎ exciting. ‎ 四．句型转换 根据要求改写下面句子：（10分）‎ ‎1. He gets home at five in the afternoon. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ ____________ ____________ _____________ he _____________ home in the afternoon?‎ ‎2. I think Tom is at home. (否定句)‎ ‎ I ______________ think Tom ____________ at home.‎ ‎3. Now it’s five thirty. (同义句)‎ ‎ Now it’s _____________ _____________ _______________.‎ ‎4. She goes to work by car.(就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _____________ ______________ she _____________ to work?‎ ‎5. Jack’s family has one shower. (就划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _____________ ____________ _____________ does Jack’s family ______________?‎ 五、补全对话：（5分）‎ A: Tom, 1 ‎ B: Well, 2 . So I get up at a quarter to seven. I never(从不) go to school late.‎ A: Do you have breakfast at home?‎ B: Yes, 3. ‎ A: And when do you go to school?‎ B: Class begins at 8:00, so I go to school at 7:45, 4 ‎ A: 5 ‎ B: I leave school at 5:05 and I get home at 5:15.‎ 六．补全对话，其中有两项是多余的。‎ A.What`s your name? B.How can we contact(联系) you? C.Can you play soccer?‎ D.I can play soccer. E.How old are you? F.What can you do? G.Can I help you?‎ A:Good morning!1. B:Yes, I want to join the soccer club.‎ A:Good,2. B:David.‎ A:3. B:I`m twelve.‎ A:4. B:My telephone number is 4352071.‎ A:5. B:Yes, a little.‎ A:Here is a card, please fill it out. B:Thank you.‎ A:You`re welcome.‎ Unit 11阅读理解及写作 一．根据短文内容及首字母提示，完成下列单词拼写。‎ I have a g 1 friend in my school. Her n 2 is Li Ying. She gets up early every day. She likes to b 3 early. She does morning exercises a 4 she gets up at six. Then she washes her hands a 5 face. She has breakfast at a 6 six forty. She leaves home at 7 o'clock. C 7 begin at ten to eight. And she has four classes in the morning and two in the a 8 . At 3:30 she plays games with her f 9 . She gets home at 5:30. She often watches CCTV news at 7:00 in the evening. And she goes to bed at ten e 10 night.‎ 二．完形填空: ‎ ‎ Mike likes music very much. 1 he was young, he wanted 2 be a famous musician. But now he is a 3 . He works in a hospital. He 4 plays light music when he is working. He finds 5 patients are happy if they 6 the beautiful music. So he puts a CD player 7 the waiting room and plays the 8 to his patients every 9 .‎ All his patients 10 Mike is a good doctor.‎ ‎( )1. A. What B. When C. Where ‎( )2. A. to B. / C. for ‎( )3. A. actor B. musician C. doctor ‎( )4. A. often B. never C. doesn’t ‎( )5. A. a lot B. lot C. lots of ‎( )6. A. hear B. listen C. listen to ‎( )7. A. under B. in C. on ‎( )8. A. music B. movie C. opera ‎( )9. A. date B. today C. day ‎( )10. A. think B. like C. want 三．阅读理解：‎ A ‎ Mike works very long hours every day. He usually gets up at 17:00. He has a shower and makes his breakfast. What a funny time to make breakfast! After breakfast he practices his guitar, then he puts on his jacket and goes to work. To get to work, he takes the number17 bus to the Star Hotel. The bus usually leaves at 19:15. He works all night. People love to listen to him! He gets home at 7:00, and he watches the early morning news on TV. He goes to bed at 8:30, a tired but happy man. Can you think what his job is?‎ ‎( )1. How long does Mike work?‎ ‎ A. 7 hours B. 8 hours C. about 9 hours D. all night ‎( )2. He ____________ and makes his breakfast.‎ ‎ A. gets up B. takes a shower C. works D. washes his face ‎( )3. What does Mike do after breakfast?‎ ‎ A. He goes to work. B. He puts on his clothes.‎ ‎ C. He practices his guitar, then puts on his jacket and goes to work.‎ ‎ D. He practices his guitar.‎ ‎( )4. Maybe he is ________________________.‎ ‎ A. a worker B. a singer C. a writer D. a teacher ‎( )5. How does he go to work?‎ ‎ A. By car B. By bikes C. On foot D. By bus B ‎ In many English homes people eat four meals a day. They have breakfast at any time from seven to nine in the morning. They eat porridge(粥) eggs or bread and drink tea or coffee at breakfast. Lunch comes at one o’clock. Afternoon tea is from four to five in the afternoon and dinner is about half past seven. First they have soup, then they have meat or fish with vegetables. After they eat some other things, like bananas, apples or oranges. But not all English people eat like that. Some of them have their dinner in the middle of the day. Their meals are breakfast, dinner, tea and supper and all these meals are very simple.‎ ‎( )6. Many English people have _________________ meals a day.‎ ‎ A. two B. three C. four D. five ‎( )7. People may have ____________ for their breakfast according to the passage.‎ ‎ A. tea and eggs B. hamburgers and tea C. coffee and salad D. eggs and fish ‎( )8. People have lunch at ______________.‎ ‎ A. any time B. nine C. five D. one ‎( )9. People don’t have _____________________ for their dinner.‎ ‎ A. bananas and apples B. soup and meat C. meat and fish D. porridge ‎( )10. Most Englishmen have dinner ________________.‎ ‎ A. at one B. at any time C. at noon D. in the evening C ‎ My name is Li Hong. I study at No.6 Middle School. At school I have a friend. His name is Jim.‎ ‎ We get up at six in the morning. We go school at seven ten. Classes begin at seven thirty. We have four lessons in the morning and two in the afternoon.‎ ‎ After school we play games. We often play football. We go home at about five. We do our homework in the evening. We go to bed（上床睡觉）at about nine fifty.‎ ‎ （ ）1. Li Hong and Jim are friends.‎ ‎ （ ）2. They get up at seven o’clock in the morning.‎ ‎ （ ）3. They have seven lessons every day（每天）.‎ ‎ （ ）4. They often play games after school.‎ ‎ （ ）5. They go to bed at 9:40 in the evening.‎ ‎ D A new term begins today. I`m glad to see my classmates again. And I saw a Canadian girl in the teachers` office. Her name is Lily Green. She came to Tianjin with her parents. Her father is a teacher and her mother works in a hospital. They came to China two and a half years ago, but the girl came here for the first time. She knows a little Chinese and her mother taught her some in Canada. She said China was beautiful and she liked to study in our school. I think she speaks English well. I hope she can teach me English and I can teach her Chinese and we can use the same desk. ‎ 选择正确答案：‎ ‎( )1.The new student`s name is ‎ ‎ A Lucy Green. B Linda Green C Lily Green ‎( )2. The student is from ‎ ‎ A Canada B Ausrtalia C U. S .A.‎ ‎( ) 3.The Green family came to China ‎ ‎ A two years ago B half a year ago C two and a half years ago ‎( )4. The new student can speak ‎ ‎ A Japanese B English C Chinese ‎( ) 5. The new student`s mother is a ‎ ‎ A teacher B doctor C housewife ‎ E I am very sorry to hear it ‎ Mr Simth was old. So it was often difficult for him to remember things. However（可是），he still liked travelling very much, so he and his wife went to Spain every year. One summer when they were there,they went to visit there friends,the ‎ Turners. They had two young daughters.‎ ‎ One afternoon Mr Smith was talking to one of the girls in the garden after lunch.”You and your sister were ill when my wife and I were here last year, were`t you? He said to her.‎ ‎“Yes, we were.” Answered the girl. “Wewere very ill.”‎ The old man said nothing for a moment, because he was thinking. Then at last he said,”Oh,I remember now! One of you died，Which one of you was it, you or your sister?‎ The girl answered.,”It was me .”‎ ‎“Oh, I`m very sorry to hear it,” said the old man.‎ 根据短文判断正误，正（T）误（F）‎ ‎（ ）1.The old man had a good memory(记忆力).‎ ‎ ( ) 2. what the old man said was true. ‎ ‎ ( ) 3. the girl was very ill and died. ‎ ‎ ( ) 4. the girl didn`t die last year. ‎ ‎ ( ) 5 The girl and her sister were both ill last year.‎ F Peter is an American boy in our class. He is tall and handsome (英俊的). He has a big nose and two big blue eyes. His hair is light brown and curly. He likes music. He likes to play football. He is on our school football team. He can speak some Chinese, but he can`t write it. We help him with his Chinese. He helps us with our English. We are good friends. ‎ ‎1. Who`s Peter? .‎ ‎2. What does he look like? .‎ ‎3. What color are his eyes and hair? .‎ ‎4. Does he like to play football? .‎ ‎5. What does he help you with? .‎ G Jane is a nice girl. She lives in London. She studies（学习）in a middle school. She gets up at six every day. She likes reading English. She’s a bright girl. She draws pictures well. After school, she often reads newspapers with her grandmother. At seven o’clock in the evening. Jane has supper（晚饭）at home. Every day at eight she does her homework and goes to bed at nine.‎ ‎（ ）1. Jane lives in ______. A. England. B. New York C. Paris D. China ‎ ‎（ ）2. What does Jane like to do? ________.‎ ‎ A. She likes reading story-books. B. She likes drawing big pictures ‎ C. She likes reading Chinese. D. She likes learning English.‎ ‎ （ ）3. She is a _______ girl.A. nice B. clever C. tall D. nice and bright ‎ （ ）4. What does she often do after school? ________.‎ ‎ A. She draws pictures B. She has supper ‎ C. She does some reading with her grandma D. She does her homework. （ ）5. What time does she go to bed? _____.A. 8:00 B. 9:00 C. 8:35 C. 9:30‎ 写作。 根据下列表格提示，以My Saturday为题写一篇60词左右的英语短文。‎ 时间 活动内容 ‎7:00 起床 ‎7:30 吃早饭 ‎8:00--11:00 做家庭作业 ‎12:00 吃午饭 ‎14:00--17:00 与朋友一起踢足球 ‎18:00 吃晚饭 ‎19:00--21:00 在家看电视 ‎21:30 去睡觉 ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Unit12 My favorite subject is science 导学案 课型：新授 ‎ 教师寄语：不要等待运气降临，应去努力掌握知识。‎ Section A 课前预习 ‎[学习目标] 1、熟练掌握表示科目的词汇。2、学会讨论喜爱的科目。3、了解由why, who 所引导的特殊疑问句。‎ ‎[预习过程]‎ 一、 通过预习，认真填写下列单词、短语及句子。‎ ‎1、单词：A、名词：学科，科目 科学 描述 字，词，话 ‎ ‎ 伙伴，合作者B、连词：因为 C、疑问代词：谁 ‎ ‎2、短语：我最喜欢的科目 他的数学老师 ‎ ‎ 最喜欢的城市 你朋友最喜欢的颜色 ‎ ‎3、句子：你最喜欢的科目是什么？ ‎ 我最喜欢的科目是体育。 你为什么喜欢体育？ ‎ 因为它是有趣的。 你的语文老师是谁？ ‎ 你妈妈最喜欢的颜色是什么？ ‎ 二、 1、（1a）理解单词的意思，并把单词与图片匹配，然后用所给的单词练习对话1c。‎ ‎2、（3a）用方框中的单词完成对话，有的可以使用两次。‎ 三、 知识点讲解：‎ ‎1、 What’s your favorite subject? 你最喜欢的学科是什么？‎ ‎1） favorite 作形容词，“最喜爱的”。相当于 “like…best”或“like…most”。例：My favorite sport is basketball.可以用I like basketball best.或 I like basketball most。‎ ‎2） favorite 还可做名词，意为“特别喜欢的人或物”。例：English is my favorite.‎ ‎2、 ——Why do you like math?——Because it’s fun.你为什么喜欢数学？因为它是有趣的。‎ Why 是疑问副词，意为“为什么”对原因提问，答语用“Because”引导的句子来回答。另外why 表示“为什么”相当于“what…for”。例如：Why do you go there? =What do you go there for?‎ ‎3、 Who is your science teacher? 谁是你的自然老师？ “who”为疑问代词，意为“谁”，对“人”来提问，在句中作主语、宾语或表语。Who作主语通常认为是第三人称单数，句中的谓语动词要与其一致，且句子要用陈述语序。例：Who is the first? Who is cleaning the window? Who are these women over there?‎ ‎[预习自测题] 一、单词拼写。根据句意及首字母提示写单词。‎ ‎1.—what’s your favorite s ?—Science. 2. I don’t like math because it’s d .‎ ‎3. She thinks P.E. is very i . She likes it very much. 4. –Who is your art t .‎ 二、单项选择。‎ ‎( ) 1. does she like music? —Because it’s very relaxing. A. What B.When C.Why D.Where ‎( ) 2. What do people in China speak?—Chinese. A. language B.subject C.sport D.club ‎( ) 3. Mary likes sport best, so P.E. is her subject. A. like B. favorite C. exciting D. fun ‎( ) 4.English is not easy, I like it very much. A. so B. if C.but D. or ‎( )5.She doesn`t like math because it`s . A.interesting B.boring C.beautiful D. relaxing Unit12 Section A 课堂学习（一）‎ The First Period (Section A 1a—2c)‎ ‎[学习目标] 1、熟练掌握表示科目的词汇。2、学会讨论喜爱的科目。3、了解由why, who 所引导的特殊疑问句。‎ 一、交流检查：‎ ‎1、组长检查预习案，以小组的形式提出预习中的问题，老师给给予指导及解答。‎ ‎2、默写下列单词及短语（限时1分钟）：字，词，话 城市 科学 老师 描述 伙伴，合作者 因为 谁 最喜爱的学科 ‎ ‎ 我的英语老师 ‎ ‎3、由一位学生打大卡片，学生读3遍，（反打，正打）巩固词汇。‎ ‎4、Page 71, 1a , 请一位学生读单词，并且说出其汉语意思，然后说出答案。‎ ‎5、运用图画中的句型“—What`s your favorite subject?—My favorite subject is…”及1a中所给的单词操练对话。‎ ‎ 1）先同位之间自由操练。2）然后由几组同学在课堂上（面对面）表演。‎ 二、听力 (1b , 2a , 2b )‎ ‎1、1b，听录音1次，在活动1a中圈出你听到的学科，让学生当堂回答，并核对答案。‎ ‎2、（2a）①听录音，将句子排序。让学生说出答案并检查。‎ ‎ ②学生自由朗读对话并背诵（P 89）听力材料。且当堂检查背诵情况。‎ ‎3、（2b）①听录音两次，交喜报到的学科与形容词匹配，并检查答案。‎ ‎ ②同位之间自由操练对话，并背诵（P 89）。课堂上抽查背诵情况。‎ 三、操练：（2c）根据2c所给的对话，自由操练，然后找6—7组学生脸对脸表演。‎ 四、课堂自测题。‎ ‎（一）根据句意及首字母提示补全单词。‎ ‎1.—Why do you like art? --B it`s exciting and interesting.‎ ‎2.I r like music because it`s very relaxing.‎ ‎3.I don`t like maths because it`s very b .‎ ‎4.Beijing is a beautiful c .5.Her favorite c is blue.‎ ‎（二）句子改写，根据所给要求，改写下列句子，每空一词。‎ ‎1．Steve likes P.E. because it`s exciting.(对画线部分提问) ‎ ‎2．John`s favorite subject is Chinese. (对画线部分提问) ‎ ‎3.I like white best.(改为同义句) My is white.‎ ‎4.Her favorite color is green.(用red改为选择疑问句) ‎ ‎5.Sorry,I really,am,busy,today,I,am(连词成句) ‎ ‎6.Jim`s favorite movie star is Jackie Chan. (对画线部分提问) ‎ ‎7.I study maths at school. (对画线部分提问) ‎ ‎8.Xiaoming`s favorite food is chicken.(改为同义句)Xiaoming chicken ‎ ‎(三)句子改错。下列各句均有一处错误，请画出并在横线上改正。‎ ‎1.What is she favorite srbject? 2.I think math isn`t my favorite subject. ‎ ‎3. He isn`t like science because it`s difficult. ‎ ‎4.--Who is your English teacher?—He is in the classroom. ‎ ‎5.You can speak a word in English. ‎ Unit12 The Second Period (Section A 3a—4)‎ 课堂学习过程：‎ 一、复习检查：1、默写句子：你最喜欢的学科是什么？ ‎ 你为什么喜欢自然？ 因为它是有趣的。 ‎ ‎2、默写你曾学过的形容词（不少于6个） ‎ 二、自主学习：‎ ‎ 1、3a用方框中的单词完成对话，有的单词可以使用两次。‎ ‎ ①检查答案。找两位学生朗读对话，同时说出答案。‎ ‎ ② Pairwork.练习这个对话。并要求学生当堂表演及背诵。‎ ‎ 2、3b ①仿照3a的对话，同学们自由操练，然后完成3b的表格。‎ ‎ ②依据自己的表格和同伴表演对话。‎ ‎ 3、（P73-4）Survey and writing.‎ ‎ ① Pairwork 两人一组以“—What`s your mother`s favorite color?” “—Her favorite color is …”做对话。然后填写表格。‎ ‎ ②根据你填写的表格写一篇短文。Like this: My mother`s favorite color is …. Her favotie food is ….…… My father`s favorite….‎ ‎ ③把你写的短文读给同学们听一听。‎ 三、课堂自测题：‎ ‎（一）翻译句子。1、你的英语老师是谁？ ‎ ‎ 2、张小姐是我们的美术老师。 3、我妈妈最喜欢的颜色是蓝色。 ‎ ‎ 4、你哥哥最喜欢的运动是篮球。 5、汤姆的妹妹不喜欢数学。 ‎ ‎ 6、她的伙伴喜欢音乐和英语两门科目。 likes two : music and English.‎ ‎（二）用适当的代词填空。1. Alicelikes singing very much. favorite subject is music.‎ ‎ 2. Tom plays football very well . likes the P.E. lesson.‎ ‎ 3. Mike and Ted come from America. favorite sport is American football.‎ ‎ 4. are good at drawing. Their favorite subject is art.‎ ‎ 5.I like science best because is interesting.‎ ‎ 6. favorite sport is volleyball. I play it well.‎ ‎ 7.—What color does her mother like best? -- favorite color is red.‎ ‎ 8.Mrs Mendoza is our teacher. teaches us art.‎ ‎ 9.My father likes watching TV. favorite TV show is History Channel.‎ ‎ 10.I come from a city in China. name is Beijing.‎ ‎（三）选择适当的选项补全对话。‎ ‎ W: 1 M: My favorite subject is music. What about you?‎ ‎ W: I like P.E. best. Why do you like music? M: 2 ‎ ‎ W: 3 M: My music teacher is Miss Li.‎ ‎ W: 4 M: No, I don`t like math. 5 ‎ ‎ W: I agree with you.‎ A.It`s boring and difficult. B.Who is your music teacher? C.Because it`s relaxing.‎ D.Do you like math? E.What`s your favorite subject? F.Is Miss Li a good teacher?‎ G.Why do you like math?‎ Unit12 Section B 课前预习 ‎[学习目标]1、掌握表示星期的词汇2、能谈论个人及他人的喜好。3、能正确说明喜爱的原因。‎ ‎[预习过程] 通过预习，请你试记下列单词、短语及句子。‎ 一、词汇A 名词：1星期一 2星期二 3星期三 4星期四 ‎ ‎5星期五 6生物学 7狗 ‎ B形容词：1.忙的，繁忙的，忙碌的 2严格的；严厉的 3疲倦的，累的 ‎ C副词： 1.然后，接下去 2在附近，到处 ‎ 二、短语。.1.在学校 2上数学课 3在星期一 ‎ ‎4午饭后 5我的最后一节课 6 加入中国历史俱乐部 ‎ ‎7喜欢和我的狗一起玩 8只跟着我跑 ‎ 三、句型。1.It`s .它是如此无聊。 ‎ ‎2.It`s .它乐趣无穷。‎ ‎3.It`s .它的确是很轻松的。‎ ‎4.Scott`s Friday He has art. ‎ 斯科特最喜欢星期五，因为他有艺术课。‎ ‎5.But his “subject” is only me. 但他唯一的“功课”就是跟着我到处跑。‎ ‎6. you school? 你真的不喜欢上学吗？‎ ‎[知识点解读]‎ ‎1、When do you have math?你什么时候上数学课。have math 上数学课。课程名词“表示上课”。‎ ‎ 例如：She has music and art on Wednesday. have music=have a music class 上音乐课。have的应用很广泛，在不同的场合有不同的意思，可译为“有，吃，喝，举行，开（会）”等。例如：谈话have a talk; 休息have a rest ; 进行体育活动have sports ; 吃晚饭 have supper .‎ ‎2、I have math on Monday, Wendesday and Friday. 此句中on Monday是介词短语，意为“在周一”。 on,at ,in 在表示时间的区别(1)at表示”在某一时刻”,如: at five 在五点钟 ;at 8:45在八点四十五分;还用于固定的短语中:at noon 在中午; at night 在夜里; at tea time在喝茶时间. (2)on指在具体的某一天,包括某年某月某日,星期几,某天的上午、下午、晚上等。on Sunday ;on Monday morning ;on July 25th ;on her birthday（3）in表示在某年、某月、上午、下午、晚上。如：in the morning ;in the afternoon ;in the evening ;in 2005 ;in September. 另：西方把Sunday作为一星期的第一天。‎ ‎3、Our teacher is very strict and I`m usually very tired after class.我们的老师是非常严厉的，下课后我通常非常累。‎ ‎(1) be strict 严厉的，严格的。其后可接介词with 或in。 ①be strict with sb.意为“对某人严格要求”。例如： Our English teacher is always strict with her students. ②be strict in sth.表示为“对某事严格要求”。例如： He is usually strict in his work. ‎ ‎(2)tired 是形容词，意思是“疲劳的，疲倦的”。常用于系动词后。如：We are usually tired after P.E.‎ 预习自测题 根据句意及首字母或音标提示填空。‎ ‎1.At 7:00 Jill eats b . 2.The third day of the week is T .‎ ‎3.Zhang Yimou is my f director.. 4.Thursday is after W .‎ ‎5.After dinner he does his h . 6.I`m very b on weekdays.‎ ‎7.My father is (对…严格) his work and my mother is (对…严格)me.‎ ‎8.The students (确实) like P.E. because it`s relaxing.‎ Unit12 Section B 课堂学习The First Period (Section B 1a—2c)‎ ‎[学习目标]1、熟练掌握表示星期的词汇。2、能够谈论个人及他人的喜好。‎ ‎ 3、能够正确说明喜爱的原因。‎ 一、交流检查：‎ ‎1、组长检查预习案，以小组的形式提出预习中的问题，老师给予指导及解答。‎ ‎2、默写下列单词及短语（限时1分钟）：在星期二 星期一 星期三 星期四下午 在星期五的上午 生物学 狗 ‎ ‎3、由一位学生打大卡片，学生读3遍，（反打，正打）巩固词汇。‎ 二、课堂学习 ‎1、P74 1a,让一位学生大声读出卡片上星期及日期说出其汉语，并排序。‎ ‎2、1b,让学生看着班里的课程表，说出在学校所学科目的英语名称。在必要的地方给予帮助，例如：政治politics,物理physics,化学chemistry，地理geography。‎ ‎3、依据课程表，用“—When do you have math? –I have math on Monday, Wednesday and Friday.”来操练对话。①两人一组自由练习。②找几组学生表演。‎ ‎4、听力。①2a，听录音一次，并记下你所听到的学科。找学生回答，并核对答案。②2b，听录音两次，学生认真听，并完成表格。找两位学生回答，并核对答案。‎ ‎③学生跟读，朗读并背诵P89此对话，老师当堂检查。‎ ‎5、操练：（2c）根据2c所给的对话，自由操练，然后找学生脸对脸表演。‎ 三、课堂自测题：‎ ‎（一）按要求写出下列名词 ‎1.teach（名词）___________________ 2. mom （对应词）______________‎ ‎3. year （复数）___________________ 4. city （复数）_________________‎ ‎5. I （宾格）________________ 6. her （主格）__________‎ ‎7. late( 反义词）__________________ 8. man （复数）______________‎ ‎9. act（ 名词）_______________ 10. long （比较级）___________‎ ‎11．free(反义词) 12.easy(反义词) ‎ ‎（二）用框中的单词完成短文。‎ ‎ ‎ because at don’t favorite get to have lunch on teacher I ___1___ up at 7:00 I ____2____ to school at 8:00. I ___3___ science at 9:00 and then I have class at 10:00 .Math is my __4___ subject .I like math ___5____ it’s interesting. Mr Tan is my math ___6____. I eat ___7___ at 12:00 and then I have music at 1:00‎ I have history class ___8____ 2:00. I ___9__ like history. But I really like my art class. I have art class __10__ Wednesday at 2:00.‎ 二、 组词成句 ‎1.your, favorite, is, what, father’s hobby________________________________‎ ‎2.uncle, blue, Mary’s does, like___________________________________________‎ ‎3.young, subject, your, is favorite, science, sister’s ‎ ‎4.school, my, is ,basketball, favorite, at, subject ‎ Unit12 The Second Period (Section A 3a—4)‎ 课堂学习过程：‎ 一、复习检查：1、默写下列单词及短语（限时2分钟）：忙的，繁忙的，忙碌的 疲倦的，累的 然后，接下去 在附近，到处 问，询问 对某人严格要求 在学校 上数学课 在星期一 ‎ 午饭后 我的最后一节课 中国历史俱乐部 ‎ 下课后 在11月 喜欢和我的狗一起玩 ‎ 只跟着我跑 ‎ 二、自主学习：‎ ‎1、3a①快读，在林梅喜欢的事物下面划线。圈出她不喜欢的东西。‎ ‎ ② 细读，完成3b的表格，并核对答案。‎ ‎③再读，回答下列问题：1）Who is the letter from? 2)What day is it today? 3)How does Lin Mei like science? 4)What`s Lin Mei`s favorite subject? 5)Why is Lin Mei very tired after class?‎ ‎ ④听录音一次，同学们只是听。然后再听录音，同学们听并跟着读。最后同学们熟读课文。‎ ‎2、3c，你在学校最哪一天？写出那一天的时间表。‎ ‎3、P75，4，用方框中所给的对话询问班上一些同学最喜欢的日子。然后向全班汇报。‎ ‎4、把你询问的情况，以短文的形式写在作文本上。然后读给全班同学听一听。‎ ‎5、Self Check.3.根据短文内容给赵杰写一封信，讲讲你喜欢的科目。‎ 课堂自测题：‎ 一、用这些单词填空 With, around, finish, strict, happy, difficult, science ‎1. After school I often play computer games ______ my best friends for over two hours.‎ ‎2. My classmates, Linda is not good at math. She can’t _____ her homework by herself.‎ ‎3. Oliver thinks English is so _____ that he is a little afraid of it.‎ ‎4. I like ______ best of all the school subjects.‎ ‎5. There is a pet dog in our house. After we get home, he always runs _____ inside the room .It shows that he is very ________.‎ 二、找错改错 A. Lucy may has some color pencils .‎ ‎ A B C ‎ B. They’re lots of food in the bag.‎ ‎ A B C C. Uncle Li don’t has a new computer.‎ ‎ A B C ‎ D. He often helps his friend on his English.‎ ‎ A B C E. Here is two books. Which is your book ?‎ A B C Unit 12 My favorite subject is science测试题 一、单项填空 ‎1.---What’s favourite sport? ---He likes “Hikers”.‎ A.he B.him C. his D.Jim ‎2.---I don’t have English novels. Can you lend to me? ---Sure.‎ A.any;some B.some;any C.some;some D.any;any ‎3.---Do you often go to the shop Sunday morning? ---No,we .‎ A.on;don’t B.on;do C.at;don’t D.at;do ‎4.--- is it today? ---It’s Monday.‎ A.When B.What time C.What D.What day ‎5.---When he have P.E? ---He it on Wendesday.‎ A.does;have B.does;has C.is;is have D.is;has ‎6.My mother’s favourite is red. A.friend B.teacher C.subject D.color ‎7.The girl’ doesn’t like science,becsause it’s ______ .‎ A.boring B.relaxing C.interesting D.fun ‎8.He doesn’t history because it’s no fun.‎ A.want to learn B.want learn C.want learning D.to want to learn ‎9.Biology is and the teacher makes me .‎ A.tired;boring B.boring;tired C.boring;boring D.tired;tired ‎10.It’s today. It’s my birthday. ‎ A.Wednesday,April 10th B.May,4th,Friday C.7th September,Sunday D.Monday,5th,May 二、词汇。（10分）‎ A)根据句意和首字母完成单词。（5分）‎ ‎1. My favorite s______ is science.‎ ‎2. Linda likes art and music because they are r______ .‎ ‎3. She is good at painting. She likes a______________ very much.‎ ‎4. The second day of a week is M .‎ ‎5. Our math teacher is very s__________ and he makes us very tired.‎ B)用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。（5分）‎ ‎6. All his _______ (class) finish at five in the afternoon.‎ ‎7. We ______ (China) people are kind to oth¬ers.‎ ‎8. We all like ______________ (play) computer games.‎ ‎9. Miss Zhang is our English teacher. We all like ______ (she) very much.‎ ‎10. The _______ (five) day of a week is Thurs¬day.‎ 三、 句型转换。（10分）‎ ‎1. Her favorite subject is music.（划提）______ ______ her favorite subject?‎ ‎2. He likes biology because it's interesting.（对划线部分提问）‎ ‎________ ________he ______ biology?‎ ‎3. Does he like to play with his cat? (作否定回答) ______ , he ______ .‎ ‎4. We have science on Tuesday and Thursday.（对划线部分提问）‎ ‎_______do ____ __ ______ science?‎ ‎5. Mr Li is my favorite teacher. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎________ ________ your favorite teacher?‎ 四、根据中文提示完成下列句子。（10分）‎ ‎1. ________ ________ ________ (他最喜爱的运动) is running.‎ ‎2. It is________, ________ __________ (星期一，九月十三日)‎ ‎3. Our teacher ________ ________ ________ (对……要求严格) us.‎ ‎4. After class we play soccer ________ ________ ________ (一小时)‎ ‎5. We ________ ________ （上数学课）every day.‎ 五、补全对话，每空一词。（6分）‎ A:1 is your favorite 2 ? B: 3 favorite subject is art.‎ A: 4 do you like art? B: Because 5 interesting.‎ A: 6 is your art teacher? B: My art teacher is Mr Liu.‎ 六 阅读理解。根据短文判断正（T）误（F）(10分)‎ Kate and Peter like sports. In summer they swim and in winter they ski ( 滑雪) . They are planning ( 计划 ) a ski trip for this weekend, but they don't know what the weather will be like. It's 7:30 now, and they are listening to the weather report (天气预报):" It's going to be -4°C. It's going to snow Friday night. Saturday and Sunday are going to be clear (晴朗 ), cold and sunny.‎ Now Kate and Peter are excited (兴奋). The weather is going to be perfect ( 完美的) for a ski trip. They want to have a wonderful weekend in the mountains (山 ). ‎ ‎( )1. Kate and Peter like listening to theweather report. ‎ ‎( )2. They plan to have a ski trip for this weekend. ‎ ‎( )3. They want to know about the price ‎( )4. It will be clear, cold and sunny on Saturday and Sunday. ‎ ‎( )5. Kate and Peter are excited because the weather is going to be perfect for a ski trip.‎ 七.完形填空。（9分）‎ Lynn and Paul are in Pairs this weekend. They 1 from London and get to the airport at 10:00 am. on Saturday morning.‎ They 2 a taxi from the airport to their hotel in the center of Pairs. On Saturday afternoon, Lynn 3 to the bookstore and 4 a lot of comic books.‎ In the evening, they 5 dinner in a French restaurant. On Sunday they 6 the Louvre Museum where they 7 the "Monalisa". They 8 all the things in the museum and they 9 very tired. They go home on Sunday evening. ‎ 八写作小天地。（10分）‎ 同学们，你们一周当中都参与了那些活动呢？你的生活是否丰富多彩呢？快拿起你的笔来描绘一下你一周的生活吧！词数在60-80之间。‎ Unit 12 My favorite subject is science阅读与写作 完形填空 A My dear friends, let me tell you something about my daily timetable(时间表). I ___ (1) at 7:00 and I go to ____ (2) at 8:00.I have science at ____ (3) and then I have math at 10:00. ____ (4) is my favorite subject. I like math because it’s ___ (5). Mr. Dai is our math _____ (6). I like him very much. I eat _____ (7) at 12:00 and then I have music at 1:00.I have history at 2:00.I _____ (8) like history because it is boring. But I __ (9) like art and I want to be an ___ (10). I have art on Wednesday at 2:00.‎ ‎( )1.A.work B. get up C. study D. go to bed ‎( )2.A.home B. movie C. school D. work ‎( )3.A.six B. nine C. eleven D. twelve ‎( )4.A.Music B. Math C. English D. Chinese ‎( )5.A.boring B. difficult C. interesting D. relaxing ‎( )6.A.teacher B. partner C. classmate D. parent ‎ ‎( )7.A.breakfast B. dinner C. lunch D. /‎ ‎( )8.A.not B. doesn’t C. don’t D. can’t ‎( )9.A.kindly B. really C. surely D. well ‎( )10.A.artist B. actor C. teacher D. president ‎ B ‎ Dear Annie,‎ ‎ Thank you for your letter.I’m glad you like your school.‎ ‎ I go to school from Monday to Friday.We have four 1 in the morning and two in the afternoon.We have 2 to do after class. 3 Monday and Wednesday afternoon we 4 sports.On Tuesday afternoon 5 of us have 6 singing class.And on Thursday afternoon some have a 7 class.On Friday afternoon we practise 8 English.My Chinese friends would like 9 with me in English.They think I am like an English teacher.Isn’t it great?‎ ‎ On Sundays and Saturdays I don’t go to school.Very often I go to the parks and have a good time 10 my family there.‎ ‎( )1.A.classes B.lesson C.class D.grade ‎( )2.A.anything B.any things C.many things D.many thing ‎( )3.A.To B.In C.On D.At ‎( )4.A.has B.have C.having D.to have ‎( )5.A.any B.one C.some D.the other one ‎( )6.A.a B.an C. the D.some ‎( )7.A.draw B.draws C.to draw D.drawing ‎( )8.A.speak B.speaks C.speaking D.to speak ‎ ‎( )9.A.talk B.talks C. to talk D.talking ‎( )10.A.for B.with C.at D.in 阅读理解 ‎ ‎ (A)‎ Mr. Grey is a teacher of English. He is not a very young man, but he is not old, either. He knows three or four languages and reads and speaks and writes them well. He reads many books and writes some. ‎ His desk is in the middle of the room. Pens, pencils and ink(墨水) bottle are on the desk. There is some paper, too. The telephone is on the left. There is a reading-lamp behind the telephone. It is almost eleven o’clock at night now. But Mr. Grey is still working. He works very late. Sometimes he works till two or three o’clock in the morning. But usually he goes to bed at about twelve or one o’clock.‎ He teaches his students very well. All of them like him. He is not only(不仅) their teacher but also(而且) their friend.‎ ‎( )1.Mr. Grey is an _____ teacher.‎ A. old B. geography C. English D. math ‎( )2.From the passage we know Mr. Grey’s languages are very _____.‎ A. good B. fast C. well D. slow ‎( )3.In the second paragraph(第二段), we know Mr. Gray works ______.‎ A. late at night B. at noon ‎ C. early in the morning D. for long time in the morning ‎( )4.Mr. Grey’s ____ is wonderful.‎ A. cooking B. music C. fishing D. teaching ‎( )5.The passage is mainly about ______.‎ ‎ A. Mr. Grey’s languages B. the friendly teacher C. Mr. Grey’s family D. a good teacher ‎ (B)‎ One day an old woman wants to see her son in Paris. When she goes to the small station，she forgets the time the train is coming and leaving. She looks around and she sees a boy playing with a toy pistol(手枪) nearby. She comes up to him and asks for help. The boy doesn’t say a word. He only points to her with his pistol, says “/ tu: tu: tu: tu: tu: tu: /”, then he runs away quickly. The old woman is very angry. She doesn’t know why the boy plays such a joke with(同某人开玩笑) her. The train comes. She gets on the train. When the train starts, she suddenly smiles: How clever the boy is! He tells her the time in that way! ‎ ‎( )1.The old woman goes to the small station___. ‎ A. to play B. to see her son in Paris ‎ C. to take a train to Paris D. to see her daughter in Paris ‎( )2.--What is the boy doing? – He ____‎ A. plays with a pistol. B. playing with a toy.‎ C. is watching a train nearby D. is playing with a toy pistol.‎ ‎( )3.Does the boy answer the woman’s question?‎ A. No, she isn’t. B. Yes, he does. ‎ C. No, he doesn’t. D. Yes, he don’t.‎ ‎( )4.The boy is a ___boy.‎ A. clever B. foolish C. sad D. happy ‎( )5.When does the train stay at the station?‎ A. 1: 40—2:20 a.m. B. 1:58—2:02 p.m. ‎ C. 2:02—1:58 p.m. D. 20:02—21:08 ‎ C ‎ 星期 时刻 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday ‎9:10 Math Math English ‎10:30 Chemistry(化学) History Chemistry Chemistry ‎11:15 History ‎ ‎1:45 Physics（物理） Physics Physics ‎3:00 English Math ‎ ‎( )1.What lesson do they have at 1:45 on Wednesday?‎ A.Physics B.Chemistry C.History D.Math ‎( )2.Do they have lessons at 10:30 on Thursday?‎ A.Yes,they have. B.No,they don’t. ‎ C.We can’t know from the timetable. D.None of the above ‎( )3.On Friday,a physics lesson begins at .‎ A.9:10 B.10:30 C.1:45 D.3:00‎ ‎( )4.How many lessons do they have in a week?‎ A.10 B.11 C.12 D.13‎ ‎( )5.How many kinds of lessons do they have have in a week?‎ A.3 B.4 C. 5 D.6‎ D Susan: Look!This is our classroom. We have most of our classes here,like Chinese,English,Math,geography,hand work and so on.‎ Linda: How many classes do you have every week?‎ Susan: Er…,let me see.We have five English classes,five Chinese classes,four science,five math,two P.E.,two geography,three politics(政治),one music,one drawing,one computer and one handwork.So we have 30 classes in a week.‎ Linda: Do you have English lesson every day?‎ Susan: Yes,of course.‎ Linda: Do you have your music and computer classes here,too?‎ Susan: Of course.we have a music classroom, a computer classroom and an art classroom.Let’s go and have a look.‎ ‎ Item Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday 第一节 1 Math Chinese Science Chinese 第二节 Math English Science English 5‎ 第三节 Chinese Politics English Chinese English 第四节 Geography 2 Computer 4 Math ‎ Noon Break 第五节 Science Geography Math Math Politics 第六节 Politics Drawing 3 P.E. Handwork E Mrs Jones is an American doctor. She is now in China. She works in a children’s hospital in Shanghai. She likes the children and she likes to work for children. She works hard in the day time and learns Chinese in the evening school. She also learns Chinese from the Chinese doctors and her Chinese friends. Now she can speak some Chinese . She can read and write some Chinese, too. She says it’s not easy to learn Chinese well. Mr Jones, her husband is a teacher. He teaches English in No. 5 Middle School. He works from Monday to Friday. He teaches 3 classes every day.‎ ‎1. Mrs Jones is _____________.‎ A. an English teacher B. an American teacher C. an American doctor ‎2. Mrs and Mr Jones are _________.‎ A. in a hospital B. in a middle school C. in China ‎3. Mrs Jones learns ________ in an evening school.‎ A. math B. Chinese C. English ‎4. Mr Jones works _______ every week. ‎ ‎ A. five days B. six days C. three days.‎ ‎5.Which is wrong ?‎ A.Mrs Jones works in a children’s hospital in Shanghai.‎ B.Mrs Jones says it’s easy to learn Chinese.‎ C.Mrs Jones learns Chinese from Chinese doctors and Chinese friends.‎ 二、 采访你的一个同学，分别提出下列问题。‎ ‎ What’s your favorite food/subject/ colour/ TV show/ sport/ city/ animal ?填写表格，然后写一篇四十字左右的短文。开头已为你写好。‎ Name Favorite food Favorite color Favorite TV show Favorite sport Favorite city Favorite animal Favorite day ‎ ‎ My classmate is a boy/ girl. He /She is years old. He/ She likes to eat very much. His/Her favorite food is ‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 参考答案 （仅供参考，难免有错误，敬请见谅）‎ Unit 3 Section A 课堂学习 ‎ 五.（一）．1. cousin parent 2 he you 3 his your 4 baseball basketball5 eight zero 6 ¬¬¬¬Pencil eraser 7 These that ‎ ‎（二） A 1. sisters 2. friends3brothers 4. parents B 1. Look2. are 3. She C 1.那是你的兄弟吗？2. 哪些是你的兄弟 The Second Period ( Section A part 3-----4 )‎ 四：1. isn’t 2 . Is Yes ,is No, isn’t ‎ 对应联系：Guo Peng isn’t my brother Is Guo Peng your brother? Yes he is No he isn’t 五、训练巩固： 1、B A C B C。 2、my are friends cousins is ‎ 六．拓展延伸：1、（1）Are those dictionarys?（2）This is a photo 2、1-4-2-3‎ Section B 课前预习 五、当堂检测： 1Are photos 2. am3.is are4. sons daughter 5. dictionarys dictionary dictionary Section B 课堂学习 The First Period ( Section B 1a-----2c )‎ 六、 训练、巩固、提高： （1）C C B A C ‎（2）.is of girl She her parents brother he is Thank you The Second Period ( Section B 3a-----part 4 )‎ 四 训练、巩固、提高：‎ ‎ 1、（1）Thanks for the photo of your family(2）.Here is my family photo.‎ ‎（3）This is my brother ----Tony （4）Please look at my family photo.‎ ‎2、B A C D A D B D C D ‎ ‎3、1). Is she your sister? Yes she is 2) Are thoseyour brothers. ?Yes they are ‎3) That is an old map 4)Are you Alice Green? 5)Are these books? 6) What’s this in English? ‎ ‎7）Yes, it is 8） That is your watch9）She/He is my good friend. 10）Is this your brother ?Yes he is No he isn’t Unit 3 单元语言知识综合训练和综合运用课 ( selfcheck )‎ 一． 语言知识综合练习。1.（1）uncle (2)daughter (3) son(4) sister(5) friend ‎ 2.（1）picture（2）uncle (3）doctor（4）Thanks.（5）grandparents ‎3.（1）Are those dictionarys?（（2）This is a photo.（3）Are these his parents.?（4）Yes he is （5）No she isn’t 4.A B C D C A D C C 二．语言综合运用：1、B A D C B A B B D A ‎ ‎2.2 (1) He is ten (2) Yes, she is (3) No it isn’t (4) Her name is Jean Brown (5) No he isn’t ‎3. 1. Is this your sister?2. That is not your eraser ‎ ‎3. Are those his friends?4. These are my brothers ‎4、1. this is father /Dad Good morning How do you do? Thank you very much ‎ ‎2. this is Hello How are you? And you ?‎ 五、1.picture i2.is 3.student 4.brother 5.sister 6.father 7.woman 8.mother9.Her 10.too Unit4 where’s my backpack?‎ ‎ Section A 课堂学习 六、训练巩固：A 1 where 2.desk 3.under 4.Where 5.sofa B 1. on the chair 2. in the drawer 3. under the bed 4. on the bookcase 5. on the sofa 6. 在床下 七．拓展延伸：答案略 The Second Period ( Section A part 3-----4 )‎ 六 、训练、巩固、提高： 1、C B C B A C A D B B ‎2、 1. That is not your baseball. It is Lucy's baseball.‎ ‎ 2.what is the name of the bird ? 3. Lucy and Lily are American girls.‎  4. Can you see a bird on the blackboard? 5. Tom's backpack, on, is, bed, his ‎3、拓展延伸：（1 It is CD（2）Where are （3）. Is under Section B 课堂学习The First Period ( Section B 1a-----2c )‎ 五、训练、提高、巩固：‎ ‎1、（1）is not (2) Are any (3)That is book (4) Where is 2、略 The Second Period ( Section B 3a-----part 4 )‎ 五、 训练、巩固、提高： 1、（1）need（2）take （3）dresser（4）on the bookcase(5) bring(6) on the bed 2、my and next are some ‎ Unit 4 单元语言知识综合训练和综合运用课 ( selfcheck )‎ 一、 语言知识综合练习。1、（1）bookcase(2) pictures (3)between(4) /(5) bring(6)take(7) Where (8) vide(9) drawer (10)‎ ‎ room 2. A B C B C A A C A C ‎3.（1）is（2）There are（3）No, I can’t（4）math books are（5）That is book.‎ 二．语言综合运用：1、1On 2. under 3. near 4. at 5. in 2、is , don’t , Is , isn’t , it , No , it , isn’t, it’s, on ‎3 Hi, my name is Dave. I have a bedroom. In my bedroom, I have a dresser. I keep my clothes in the dresser. I have an alarm clock on my dresser. I also have a bookcase, a desk,and a chair. I put my pens, ruler and eraser My math book is on my desk. .My backpack is under it. Ihave a bed ,too.‎ ‎(1) Dresser clothes an alarm clock a bookcase, a desk, a chair. pens, ruler , eraser desk math book backpack bed ‎（2）In my bedroom, in the dresser on my dresser. in my desk on my desk.‎ ‎(3) On his dresser. (4) His backpack is .under his desk _ (5) in his desk. 4、书面表达：略 Unit 5答案 SectionA预习案 ‎1.Do you have a ping-pong Yes,I do2.Do you have a ping-pong pat? No,I don’t ‎3.Does Tom have a compnter? Yes,he does.‎ ‎4.Let’s play football. 5.That sownds good.‎ ‎(二)1.C 2.D 3.A 4.C 学习案（一）1.Does your brother have a ping-pong pat? Yes,he does.‎ ‎2.He has a football,what about you?3.Does Jenny have a computer? No,she doesn’t.‎ ‎4..Do they have a TV? Yes they do.5.Do we have any basketballs?‎ ‎（二）1.Do you have a ping-pong ball?2.Do they have a computer?‎ ‎3.Does James have a basketball?4.He wants to play soccer. 5.The family has two children.‎ SectionA （二）t;(一)1.Does have. Yes does.‎ ‎2.don’t like 3.Where does play. 4.doesn’t have 5.Let’s join basketball club ‎6.That sounds great.‎ ‎（二）1.to play 2.Sounds 3.doesn’t have 4.Play volleyball 5.Does have 6.Playing.‎ SectionB:预习案（一）1.C 2.D 3.C 4.A 5.A 6..B 7.B 8.A 二、1.interesting 2.relaxing 3.difficult 4.only 5.boring ‎（二）6.colletions 7.more 8.them 9.playing 10.watches SectionB(一)1.This song sounds interesting 2.Let’s play computer games ‎3.What sports do you like? 4.Do you want to play basketball?‎ ‎5.Do you have a tennis racket?‎ 二、1.do 2.have 3.don’t 4.has 5.baseball 6.where 7.them 8.help 9.thank 10.bye SectionB(二)一、racket friend rackets doesn’t. Let’s bats and How 二、1.Fourteen 2.six 3.six basketballs and six volleyballs 4.in three big bags 5.you are 14‎ 单元综合能力测评 一、1.bat 2.difficult 3.boring 4.clubs 5.volleyball 二、1-5.AABCA 6-10.DBBDB 三、1.don’t have,or 2.does,have 3.they do 4.I have a volleyball but I don’t have a soccer ball. 5.What does,have 四1.Let’s have 2.Watching the football game,interesting 3.three only son 4.know more 5.join,volleyball club 五、(1)do (2)play (3)sounds (4)have (5)don’t (6)baseball (7)bat (8)where (9)them (10)Thanks 六、(1)picture(2)know (3)name (4)from (5)China (6)mother (7)with (8)different (9)classes (10)help 本单元阅读理解答案 ‎（A）1-5BBACD （B）6.She likes table tennis and ice skating very much. 7.No,they don’t. 8.Helen and Joe. 9.Lucy,Lily and Jack. 10.No,they aren’t ‎（C）1.Fourteen 2.Six 3.Six basketballs and six volleyballs 4.In three big bags5.You are fourteen . (D)1-5CBBCA (E)1-5ACADB (F)1-5FTTFT ‎(G)1.Many 2.parties 3.dancing 4.her 5.sports 6.swim 7.books 8.happy ‎(H) 1—5:CACBB (I ) 略 初一英语单元综合练习（Unit 6）参考答案 一、1—5.AACAD 6—10.CCACC二、1.runner 2.carrots(chicken) 3.fruit 4.dinner 5.star 6.healthy 四、1—5.BAACA 6—10.BCCBA 阅读与写作 一、1—5.DADBA 6—7.BB二、1—5.DDBDA 6—10.BAACA 11—15.BCBBC 三、1.daughter 2.names 3.house 4.rooms 5.soccer 6.under 7.plays 8.every 9.desk 10.pi 初一上册 Unit 7 How much are these pants? 导学案 参考答案 Section A .课前预习：‎ 语言点导学导练：句型转换：1） How,much 2) How much ,water ,it 3) what’s ,the ,price ,of 选择：1） C 、B Section A 课堂练习The First Period .‎ 四、巩固练习 2、单项选择 1) B 2) C 3) C3、翻译（取译点）‎ ‎1） How much is this skirt ? 2) This bag is only 50 yuan . 3) How much are the yellow sochs ? ‎ ‎4) – How much are these blue pants ? - 12 dollars .‎ ‎5) - How much is your blackbag ? - 9 dollars .‎ The Second Period 训练巩固2 、句子排列We have black hats for fifteen dollars .What color do you want ? How much is her red jacket ?Do you want a green sweater ?‎ They have shorts in yellow and red .‎ ‎3、补全对话 1.B 2. E 3. D 4.F 5. A 6. C ‎4、完成句子 1）take ,this ,yellow ,skirt .2) How , much ,are ,shoes .3) black ,pants ,are ,long Secction B课前预习 ‎（三）1. F 2.T 3 T 4. F 5 T (四) 填空 1）to buy 2) sell 3) afford 选择： B C Section B 课堂练习 四、2、选择：A A B B C 3、补全对话：1、B 2、 E 3、D 4、C 5、A 五、拓展延伸 1、twenty-three 2、Seventeen 3、twelve 4、eighteen 5、fifteen The second period 四、训练巩固 2、单项选择1）A 2) A 3) C 4) D 5) D ‎3、汉译英：1）We have cats in all colors .2) The sweater is cheap .‎ ‎4) Her new sweater is blue and white . 5) Can you afford the price ?‎ Unit 7 单元语言知识综合训练和综合运用课 (Self Check) ‎ 一、1.much 2.short 3.color 4.help 5.afford 6.clothes 7.sale 8.welcome 9.yourself 10.buy 二、1．have 2.in five 3.like 4.How 5.pants 6.blue 7.take 8.are 9.pants 10.Your.‎ 三、1.B 2.D 3.B 4.A 5.D 6.A 7.C 8.D 9.B 10.B 四、1.what can for 2. What’s the price 3.Which boy 4. How much 5..what color 五、1.We have great shirts for only 50 dollars . 2. We have sweaters in all colors for girls .3. The shoes of are on sale in this shop . 4. Do you know the boy in blue pants .‎ ‎5. I want to know the price of the black car .‎ 六、 B D E A C 初一英语同步阅读与写作训练（ Unit 7 ）‎ A. (A) 1.A 2.C 3.D 4.A 5.C (B) 6.T 7.F 8.F 9.F 10.T (C) 11. D 12.B 13.D14C.15 D.(D) 16.C 17.C 18.B19.A 20.B 21.D 22.D 23.A 24.B 25.A 26.B 27.C 28.D 29.A 30.C B. 1.F 2.D 3.C 4.A 5.B 初一上册Unit8 When is your birthday?答案 I.词汇平台。A．1．date 2．December 3．February 4．trip 5．Party II．选择填空。1-5BBCAB 6-10BCBAB ‎ III．句子训练。1．happy family 2．His twelfth 3．basketball game 4．Has ; English speech contest 5．Second ;May IV. A.1-3BCA B.1-3FTT 阅读与写作I．A、1-5CBDDB 6-10ACCBD B、1-5BCBAC 6-10CACAB ‎ II．A．1-5CBDDD B、1-5ABDDC C、1-5CBADC D、1。Yellow 2.Because yellow can be seen best from far away. 3. No, it isn’t. 4. The drivers 5. They should wear yellow.E. 1-5 DACAD F. birthday school Happy runs present 仅供参考 Unit 9导学案参考答案 Section A 课前预习：‎ 一、1-5 CDBCD 二、1. thriller 2. comedy 3. action movie 4. documentary 5. Beijing Opera Section A 课堂学习（I）：‎ 四、（一）1-5 CCCDA 6-8 AAC （二）1. Do you want to go to a movie? 2. I don’t like action movies. 3. What kind of movies do you like? 4. people don’t like五、1-5 EGFBH 6-8 CDA Section A 课堂学习(II)：1. goes 2. two 3. comedies 4. funny 5. action 6. ninth 7.movie8. parties 9. Chinese 10. same 11-15 BBCBC 16-18 ACA 19. When is your birthday?‎ ‎20. What kind of movies do you like? 21. When do you often go to movies? ‎ ‎22. Does he want to go to see Beijing Opera? 23-27 TFTTF Section B 课前预习：‎ ‎1. actor 2. too 3. old 4. singular 5. come 6. birthday 7. learn 8. can’t 9. children 10. them 11. sounds 12. they’re 13. think 14. boring 15. And 16. kind 17. too Section B 课堂学习(I): 1. comedies 2. twelfth 3. gas 4. to see 5. aren’t 6. doesn’t like 7. sing 8. successful 9. stories 10. really ‎ ‎11. Does Ben like comedies? No, he doesn’t. 12. I don’t think comedies are funny.‎ ‎13. Do you want to go to a movie? 14. What kind of movie do you like?‎ ‎15. What kind of movies does she like? 16-20 AABAC 21-25 DCACC Section B 课堂学习(II): ‎ 四、1. my favorite actor 2. go to a movie 3. a new movie 4. my father’s birthday ‎ 5. a successful comedy 6. one interesting thing 7. see Beijing Opera 8. on weekends ‎ ‎9. Chinese history 10. 和我的朋友一起 11. 看图 12. 什么类型的电影 13. students ‎ ‎14. weekends 15. finds 16. favorite 17. think successful 五、1-5 BDDCC 语言知识综合训练与运用：‎ 一、1. actors 2. successful 3. too 4. students 5. learns 6. scary 7. interesting ‎ ‎ 8. favorite 9.movies 10. Really ‎ 二、11-15 BCAAD 16-20 CDBBC 21-25 ACBAC 26-27 AC 三、1-5 EJAHC 6-10 FIBGD ‎ 四、1. Does, want, doesn’t 2. What, kind ,of 3. doesn’t ,like 4. When, does, go ‎ ‎ 5. don’t, think, is 6. favorite ,actor ,is 7. likes, too 8. Do you want to see a Chinese action movie? 9. go, to 10. parents, also 五、1. Let’s 2. have 3. action movie 4. really 5. thank you 6. Does 7. Sorry ‎ ‎ 8. sounds 9. thriller 10. boring 同步阅读与写作：‎ ‎ 1-5 CBADB 6-10 CAADC 11-15 BDBDC 16-20 BACDB 21-25 BBCAA 26-30 BCBBB 31-35 FTTFT 36-40 BDBDD 41-45 TTFFF 46-50 BBACC 51-55 FTTTF 56-60 BDACB ‎ 61. He likes eating fish very much. / Fish. 62. His wife and her friends. 63. The fish weighs one kilo. / One kilo. 64. Some bread. 65. Yes. Sam knows that his wife eats the fish. ‎ ‎66. with 67. learn 68. helps 69. class 60. weekends 71. movie 72. favorite 73, really 74. us 75. too ‎ XII 展示台 (One possible version)‎ ‎ I like movies. I often go to see action movies. I think they are exciting. I think documentaries are boring. I don't like thrillers because they are scary. I also go to see Beijing Opera. I think it's interesting. What about you?‎ Unit10: Section A课前预习 一．1．play chess 2.get on well with3.speak Chinese4.art club5.play the guitar6.help …with7.弹钢琴8.说英语9.加人音乐俱乐部10.弹的很好 二．1.你能跳舞吗？2.我们想去加人象棋俱乐部3.你想加入什么俱乐部4.你能弹的很好吗？是的，我能5.过来，加人我们。‎ 三．1.speak 2.play, No3.with 4.well5.swim 四．1.likes wants to join2.can play plays3.wants swimming Section A (1a—2c)‎ 四．1．1）Can you play the piano or dance?2）What club do you want to join ?3）Can you play basketball?4）May I know your name ?5）Are you good at dancing ?‎ ‎2. 4,1,5,7,2,3,6,8‎ 五．1.Can play I can 2.What do want join 3.What can do 4. can’t play 5.What club do you want to join 6.Can Linda sing songs? No, he can’t.‎ Section A (3a--4)‎ 四．1.music club2.cooking club3.art club4.sports club5.chess club 五．1.Lily 2.14 3. Swimming club 4. 0591—7895643‎ Section B 课前预习 一．1.play the2.the 3.rock band 4.in music room5.show 6.join 二．1.你能说英语吗？2.你的兄弟能游泳吗？3.Li Ming wants to join the music club 4.我可以知道你的名字吗？5.We want two good musicians for our rock band.‎ 三．1.C 2.C 3.C 4.A 5.A 四．1.Can play 2. be policeman 3.show new pen 4.dance well 5.join the English SectionB(1a—2c)‎ 二． can Can can’t guitar can and drums Great can or but ‎ 四．1. him his 2. children3.Don’t speak speak 4. pianos5. Japanese Japan6.swimmer swimming 7. draws ‎ 五．Cindy Jones 12 Nov.18th 8555—6785 cindyjones@163.net I can swim. Swimming club SectionB (3a—4)‎ 四．1.CACAB 2.1) Can dance she can’t2)What day 2)help with 3) What can join 4) What can see 5) How many do want 五．略 单元语言知识综合训练 一．1-5 CCCAA 2-10 BBCAAC 二．1.play the guitar 2.join the music club 3. play chess 4.get on well with children 5. speak English 6.join the swimming club 7. play the drums 8.help children with swimming 9. sing well 10.school Music Festival ‎ 三．1.know 2.paint 3.to see 4.doesn’t have 5.learn ‎ 四．1.Can you 2.What do 3. what can do 4.can’t 5.don’t think is 6.He can’t play volleyball 7.Can the twins play the piano ?Yes , they can /No , they can’t 8.What can you do ?9.What club does Anna want to join ?10.Who are you ?‎ 五．1. C 2.C 3.C 4.D 5.B 六．BEACD 七．1.What club do you want to join ?2.Tom can play the guitar, but he can’t play it well 3. Come and show us your skills .4.They can play the drums.5.Do you get on well with the children ?‎ 八．1.musicians 2. little 3.why 4. address 5.with 6.guitar 7.Chinese 8.breakfast 9.swimming 10.favorite 同步阅读与写作 A. DAADC B.TFFTT C.FFTFF D.ABDAC E.TFFFF F.DCABB G. 1.movie 2.comedies 3.Baotian Lee 4. Guo Peng 5.artist H.1.BABBA 2. 1)the drums piano 2)can’t speak 3)paint 4)drums 5)sports I .略 ‎ Unit 11 Section A 一、完成句子： 1、usually 2、takes a shower 3、arrive 4、goes to bed 5、what time is it 二、首字母： 1、time 2、breakfast 3、job 4、hours ‎ ‎ Section 1-2A三、1、plays 2、take 3、eats 4、does 5、Does run 四、1、Does do 2、doesn•t help 3、what time 4、don•t think is五、1、up at 2、for 3、in 4、by 5、to 6、from to 六、9、5、4、2、1、6、3、8、7、10‎ ‎ Section A 3a-4四、补全短文： up 6：00 、take a shower 、go to school 、7：00 、school、go home 、4:10 、have dinner 、6：30 、do home work 、go to bed 、9：00‎ ‎ SectionB 1——2a 练习单词拼写：1、usually 2、shower 3、works 4、homwoerk 5、letters 6、wishes 7、jobs 8、soon 9、listens 10、writes二、改写句子 ：1、what time do get 2、don•t is 3、half past five 4、how does go 5、how many showers have 三、GAEBC ‎ SectionB 3a——4三、阅读理解填词：1、friends 2、different 3、study 4、good 5、does 6、likes 7、favorite 8、have 9、weekdays 10、bike /bus ‎ ‎ Unit11 测试题答案 二、选择：21——25 CABAC 26——30 BCCBA 31——35 BCCCC 三、补全短文： get up 6：00 、take a shower 、go to school 、7：00 、school、have dinner、6:30、do home work 、go to bed 、9：00‎ 四、句型转换：1、what time does ，get 2、don•t is 3、half past five 4、how does go 5、how many showers have 五、略.‎ ‎ 阅读理解及写作答案 一、1、good 2、name 3、be 4、and 5、and 6、about 7、classes 8、afternoon 9、friends 10、every 二、1-5 BACAC 6-10 ABACA ‎ 三、 A篇 1-5 DBCBD B篇 6-10 CADDD C篇TFFTFD篇 1-5 CACBB E篇FFFTT ‎ F篇 1.He is an American boy.2.He is tall and handsome.3.His eyes are blue and his hair is light brown.4.Yes,he does. 5.He helps us with our English G篇、1-5ADDCB ‎________________________________________‎ Unit 12 My favorite subject is science测试题答案 一、 CAADB DAABA 二、1 subject 2 relaxing 3 art 4Monday 15 strict 6 classes ‎ ‎7. Chinese 8. playing / to play 9. her 10. fifth ‎ 三 、1. What is 2. Why does, like 3. No, doesn't 4. When, you have 5. Who is 四、 1. His favorite sport 2. Monday, September 13th 3. is strict with ‎ ‎4. for an hour 5. have math 五、1. What 2. subject 3. My 4 .Why 5. it's 6. Who 六、 FTFTT 七、1. come 2. take 3. goes 4. buys 5. have 6. visit 7. see 8 .like 9.are 八 One possible version:‎ This week, I am very busy because I have something to do. On Monday morning, I have English. I think English is interesting and I like it very much. Then on Tuesday afternoon, I have science. It's difficult but I like it, too. Next on Wednesday morning, I have biology. It's boring, but on Thursday afternoon, I practice music at our school music club. I think music is my favorite. On Friday afternoon, I practice English at our school English club. I am very happy there. On Saturday morning, I go shopping with my mother. I think shopping is very fun. On Sunday afternoon, I play football with my friends. I think it's very exciting there. What a busy but fun week I have!‎ Unit 12 My favorite subject is science阅读与写作答案 完形填空：（A）BCBBC ACCBA （B）ACCBC ADCCB 阅读理解：（A）CADDD （B）BDBAB （C）ABBDC （D）English Chinese P.E. music Science (E) CCBAC